JP6545752B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a so-called ball and ball type gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") and a rotary type gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachislot machine").

  In a general pachinko machine, when the game ball is received in the winning opening formed in the game area of the game board (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"), a big hit lottery is executed, and the big hit lottery lottery result The variation display of the special symbol according to is performed and the rendering operation according to the result of the big hit lottery is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine, when winning in a big hit lottery and becoming a big hit, it shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player, and provides various privileges to the player including the payout of the game ball.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if it is not winning in the big hit lottery, in order to prevent the interest of the player in the normal gaming state from being lowered, it is expected as if the big hit lottery was won. The effect (hereinafter referred to as "reach effect") is executed. On the other hand, such pachinko machines are executing various various rendering operations so as not to make the player feel bored even when they actually win a big hit lottery and become a big hit (eg, for example, Patent Document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2007-282722

  Although conventional pachinko machines are equipped with an effect control unit for controlling such an effect operation, in recent years, the effect control unit has performed complicated electronic control to realize various effects. There is. For this reason, when an unexpected failure caused by static electricity or the like occurs while the effect operation is controlled by the effect control unit, there may be an event that the actual effect content of the effect operation is not properly represented . When such an event occurs, in recent pachinko machines, a device for controlling the appearance of the event so as to be inconspicuous is made on the appearance of the player.

  According to such control, while the influence on the progress of the game is suppressed, the player may not be able to encounter the rendering operation which should have been able to encounter originally, and such a rendering operation It can lead to the loss of the opportunity to fully enjoy. Moreover, with such control, the fact that a player can not be encountered is hardly exacerbated by anyone other than the player after the fact, and is taken up unless there is a significant influence on the progress of the game. In the case of minor obstacles, there have been problems that it is difficult to take adequate measures in the subsequent development.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to make effective use of the game machine to be developed in the future by making it easy to carry out post-mortem analysis.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes a lottery process based on establishment of a lottery condition, and outputs a command to the effect control unit according to the result of the lottery process , The display control unit which displays the lottery result on the display device based on the display device, and the command received from the game control unit, and the supply of power is started or being supplied according to the operation of the power switch. The apparatus further comprises: a main power source for stopping the power; and a power failure monitoring unit for outputting a power failure notification signal immediately before the power being supplied is stopped, the effect control unit including a control unit and the inside or outside of the control unit. A history information storage unit provided with a specific area, a video storage unit capable of storing video data used for displaying an image, a time acquisition unit for acquiring current time, and a power failure notification signal by the power failure monitoring unit An auxiliary power source that starts power supply to at least the control unit, the history information storage unit, and the time acquisition unit triggered by power, or stops power supply triggered by the start of power supply by the main power source; The control unit writes history information based on time information acquired by the time acquisition unit into the specific area, history information writing means, and command analysis means for analyzing contents of a command accepted from the outside when a read restricting means for restricting the reading of the history information written in the specific area, if the accepted command is a specific command, the specific region to release the restriction by the read restriction means permitting reading of the written history information, the accepted command by the command analyzing means before Kitoku If a command other than commands, game machine, characterized in that it comprises a history information control unit that does not permit reading of the history information written in the specific area to maintain regulated by reading regulating means.

  First, in the gaming machine, the control unit of the effect control unit controls the effect operation based on the schedule data according to the result of the big hit lottery over the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the game control unit doing. In the periphery of the gaming machine, there is always an obstacle to ensuring the continuation of normal operation by the control unit due to the influence of static electricity and the like. Under such circumstances, the control unit may generate an event that can not execute part of the rendering operation among the rendering operations based on the schedule data.

  In such a case, instead of normally executing the part of the rendering operation, the control unit executes the complementing process for compensating the part of the rendering operation in a mode in which the event is hard to recognize. Every time such a complementary process is performed, history information including the execution history is written in the specific area at each time acquired by the time acquisition unit. The history information written in this specific area is subject to read restriction in advance and can not be read normally, but when a specific command is input, the read restriction is released and this history information can be read out. it can. Then, based on such history information, it is necessary to grasp after the fact that the player can not enjoy the part of the rendering operation among the rendering operations that the player should have originally encountered. Will be able to For this reason, it is possible to easily analyze the cause of the failure caused by the above-described event, and it is possible to take measures to make it unlikely that an unexpected failure will occur in a game machine to be developed in the future.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to effectively utilize the gaming machine to be developed in the future by facilitating the subsequent analysis.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left unit of the side speaker illumination decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right unit of the side speaker illumination decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp lighting unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp lighting unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp lighting unit from diagonally front lower. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) later. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electric decoration unit, and shows it with a top lamp base from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp | ramp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotation lamp | ramp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a saucer unit. It is a rear perspective view of a saucer unit. It is a top view of a saucer unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view shown in the state which removed the back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown behind, in the state where the back plate of a plate unit and the ball unit for balls were removed. It is a disassembled perspective view shown disassembled for every main component of a pan unit and showing it from the front. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows the pan unit main body in a pan unit from the front. FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball extraction mechanism in a pan unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball extraction mechanism in a pan unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a saucer unit. It is a bottom view in the state where the operation button unit substrate of the operation button unit in a saucer unit was removed. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in a saucer unit from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a saucer unit. It is a sectional view of a handle device attached to a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle device and the striking-ball launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a striking-ballistic launch apparatus. (A) is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the dish unit, (B) is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a second ball outlet and a flow of gaming balls in the dish unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the laterally long ball | bowl inflow port in a pan unit, and a storage pan. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows a glass unit from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main part before attaching a part. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a main part frame main part before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the body frame which attached parts. It is a cross-sectional top view of a pachinko machine cut by the horizon line of the middle (main control board box part) of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a main part frame which shows the structure by the side of a main part frame to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder, cut in the longitudinal direction in an assembled state. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front component, game panel, panel holder etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally back. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the main control board box fixed to the board substrate holder for the panel from diagonally behind. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the panel substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control substrate box of FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. FIG. 7 is a schematic view of a function display sticker. FIG. 10 is a partial view of a function display sticker on the game board through the game window. They are the perspective view (A) of the whole batting launching device, and the perspective view in the state where a firing motor part was removed (B). It is an exploded perspective view of a hit ball launcher. They are a front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a firing motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the ball striking launch device and the firing rail in the state which is not operating the operation handle part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher and the firing rail in the state which is operating the operation handle part. It is the top view (A) of the slide member provided in a bat firing device, a front view (B), the perspective view (C) seen from the front, and an AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B). They are a perspective view (A), a top view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B), and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship of a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball | bowl passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball | bowl passage unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows a relationship with a ball | bowl passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball | bowl passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the award ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between a delivery motor and the sprocket as a delivery member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the passage of a prize ball unit, and a drive relation. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul opening. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul opening. It is a rear perspective view which shows the relationship between a lock device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut in a horizontal direction at a position slightly below the longitudinal center of the pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view showing a detailed relation between a lock device and a side wall of a main part frame. It is a side view (A) of a lock device, and a perspective view (B) seen from the front side. A perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device (A), a perspective view (B) of a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device (B), (C). It is an exploded perspective view of a lock device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding lever for glass doors, and the sliding lever for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the board | substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes a main part of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the frame substrate holder. It is a rear view of a board | substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit of the state which removed the delivery control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of rear view of a pachinko machine which shows wiring etc. of a delivery control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board for describing the cross-sectional location of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 137. It is a pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back in the state where the cover body was opened. It is a side view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the open side of a cover body. It is a pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the pivotal support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in the state where the cover body concerning a second embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the delivery control board box which carries out polymerization contact with the lower part of a cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inner side of the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left rear. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main component, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at what was disassembled from diagonal back. It is the perspective view which disassembled each apparatus with which a game panel is mounted | worn, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the side prize-winning opening member diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at center characters obliquely from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center part into every main member and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the center unit of the center goods and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the movable shelf unit of center goods, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the shelf drive unit of a movable shelf unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the lower right decoration unit of the center character and was seen diagonally from the front. It is sectional drawing which shows the structure of the principal part of a lower right decoration unit. It is the perspective view which disassembled the right decoration unit of the center character and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit diagonally from the front. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production state by the 1st character role unit. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the first character role unit seen obliquely from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the 1st character character item unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the left arm unit of the 1st character item unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the right arm unit of the 1st character item unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm drive unit of the 1st character combination product unit from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which looked at the face slide unit of the 1st character role-of-goods unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the face slide unit into the face slide mechanism part and the face movement part, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the face slide mechanism part and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive part of the face slide mechanism part diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive part from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which looked at the face movement part and the face type unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the face movement part into the mouth mechanism unit and the face base part, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the opening mechanism unit from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which disassembled the opening mechanism unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the face base part and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which made the face type | mold unit of a 1st character role-of-article unit transparent, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production state by a signboard type character unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the signboard type character and character unit from diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the signboard type character product unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the signboard movable part of the signboard type character product unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production state by the 2nd character role unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd character character article unit from diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the character unit of the 2nd character role unit from diagonally from the front. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the character unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at what was disassembled from diagonal back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the mechanism part of the character unit diagonally from the front, (b) is a front view in the state where the cover member was removed. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a mechanism part of a character unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door unit of the 2nd character role unit from diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door unit from diagonally back. It is an enlarged front view near the viewing window in a game board. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the character unit and members disposed on the rear side, as viewed obliquely from behind. It is the perspective view which disassembled the character unit and the member arrange | positioned at the back side, and was seen from back diagonally. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production | presentation state by a boat-shaped character article unit. It is the perspective view which looked at a bowl-shaped character item unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the boat-shaped character item unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which is the initial position where the bowl-shaped decoration body in a bowl-shaped character item unit is an initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which the bowl-shaped decoration body moved to the middle position. It is a front view which shows the state which the trapezoid decorative body moved to the terminal position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production state by a combination service unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the composite product unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the composite role unit from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which removed the cover member of the composite product unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the composite product unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the operation state of a combination service unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the trap type character unit from diagonally from front. It is a perspective view which shows the operation state of a trap type character article unit. It is the perspective view which disassembled the trap type property unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl guidance channel | path and the star light emission light-guide plate from diagonally from the front. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a ball | bowl guidance channel | path and a star light emission light-guide plate. It is the perspective view which looked the liquid crystal display device and the decoration part of the circumference from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at a back box, a drive board | substrate, etc. from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which disassembled it and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a front view of a game board at the time of making all the prizes move to a production position. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. FIG. 223 is a block diagram showing an exemplary configuration of part of the peripheral control board etc. shown in FIG. 223. It is a figure which shows an example of a log | history preservation | save area | region. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main control processing which main control MPU of a main control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power supply shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply disconnection occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of peripheral control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a log | history write-in process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control side steady processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control side base timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control side command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control side command reception end interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a log | history read-out process.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame constituting the pachinko machine, a main frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of the game hall and an open frame pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 4 and the game window 101 and the game window 101 in which the player can visually recognize the game area 605 pivotally supported by the body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable and formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is hit. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing bracket 14 for reinforcing the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the lower front of the outer frame 2. In addition to the game board 4 being detachably attachable to the main body frame 3 as described above, the ball firing device 650 (see FIG. 5) and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body A substrate unit 1100 provided with various control substrates for controlling electrical components provided on the frame 3 and a power supply substrate is attached and covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main frame 3 A cover 1250 is detachably provided. Furthermore, in addition to the plate unit 300 described above, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the game window 101. In addition, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same rectangular size when viewed from the front, so that the main body frame 3 can not be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 10 (A), a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 12 (A) (B), a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D (C) , E-E cross-sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support bracket of the outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 extending in the vertical (upper and lower) direction. , 13 are assembled in a square shape by connecting them with a connecting member 19 for connecting their respective ends. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape having a level difference between the center and the left and right, and an engagement notch in which a protruding center portion is formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 The side frame plates 12 and 13 are fitted on the side surface of the left and right portions of which the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the flat surface of the left and right portions. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  Then, in this state, the insertion hole 21 and the connecting member 19 which are formed in the both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and the both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame 11 respectively are one step lower (Two in the case of illustration) connection holes 22 (the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 of FIG. (In the illustrated case) and is fastened with a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connection screws 23 from the upper or lower side, and further, a plurality (two or more) In the illustrated case, two (two in the figure) mounting holes 24 and a plurality (three in the case of the figure) of connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 are made coincident with each other. In the illustrated case, the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening them with the three connection screws 26 and 27). 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, among the three connection screws 26 and 27, one connection screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 to the connection member 19, but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. It directly connects with the member 19 from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wooden as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 Is made of an extruded sheet of lightweight metal such as aluminum alloy. The reason why upper frame plate 10 and lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wooden as in the prior art is that when pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island in a row in a game arcade, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical surface of the island. Although it is necessary to carry out a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by striking a nail on the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that the nail is easy to strike. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be formed thinner while maintaining the strength compared to the conventional wood, so the inner side of the side frame plates 12 and 13 When viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to each other, the lateral width can be widened. Therefore, the game board 4 having a large dimension in the left-right direction can be attached to the main frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of aluminum alloy flat plates, sufficient rigidity can not be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plates 12 (the side frame plates 13 have the same structure as well. A space 28 (the space 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib on the inner side of the rear part of T.) is drawn out and formed to increase the thickness h1 of the rear part There is. Of course, this thickness h1 has a size equal to or slightly smaller than that of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 which is one step lower than the groove portion 29 (the side The groove 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG. From the groove portion 29 to the front end portion of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12B to 12D, the inner side surface thereof is a flat plate in which the other portion of the left and right portions one step lower However, the flat portion has a shallow recess for material reduction. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, a recess 30 (a side frame in which the hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted into the opposite surface (outside surface) where the groove 29 is formed. The recess 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the side frame plate 12 on the pivotal support side formed as described above, the drooping piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is provided on the upper side of the side frame plate 12 in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19. The mounting holes 31 for fixing with the fixing screws 32 are formed at the same time and are made to coincide with the mounting holes 69 formed in the vertical contact pieces 72 of the lower support fitting 66 at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing fitting 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the front portion of the side frame plate 12 below the mounting hole 33.

  On the other hand, in the side frame portion 13 on the open side, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connection member 19, an attachment hole 37 for attaching the closing projection 38 with the attachment screw 39 is drilled in the upper portion. The mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is drilled, and the mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 at the lowermost position with the fixing screw 44 is further provided. It is formed.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the closing projections 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3. And lock the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and pivot it to one side, as will be described in detail later. The engagement can be released to open the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2.

  In addition, the cover reinforcement fitting 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the lower side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface at the time of closing. The surface and sides of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the open upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15 of the outer frame 2.

  By the way, it is attached along one side upper surface of upper support fitting 45 and cover reinforcement fitting 14 which also has a function of connecting upper frame plate 10 and side frame plate 12 as a structure for pivotally supporting body frame 3 so as to open and close freely. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hook 47 which is formed by being bent toward the center of the tip from the side of the support projection 46 in the support projection 46 projecting forward. An axial support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper axial support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed in a shape projecting forward, but a support projection 68 is projected upward from this projecting portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 The support hole formed in FIG. 72) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main frame 3 with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support bracket 66, By pivotally supporting the support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 in the support hole 47, the shaft can be supported in a freely open / close manner.

  The upper support fitting 45 is mounted on the mounting step 49 formed concavely on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the support side. The mounting screw 51 is inserted from the top by aligning the mounting holes 48 (two in the case of illustration) and the mounting holes 50 (two in the case of illustration) formed in the mounting step 49 with one another. The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by fixing to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, there is a hanging piece portion 53 that abuts the outside of the side frame plate 12, and in the hanging piece portion 53, a mounting hole is bored. The upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 are fixed and the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 are connected via the upper support fitting 45 by fixing them with the fixing screw 32. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state in which the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 are aligned as described above. The mounting screw 71 is inserted into the mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66 so that it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is a side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 which are the constituent members with the connecting member 19. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength is high and the square shape is robust It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement between the connecting member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 described above, the left and right of the connecting member 19 are lowered in the groove 29 when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Because one part of the part is fitted in, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 becomes strong, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Also, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, the upper support fitting 45 is mounted at a predetermined position as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of each frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 on a pachinko island stand (not shown), adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lender. Also, when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, a lock member 80 is rotatably pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 in an openable / closable manner. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support projection 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at its tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support projection 46. The hanging wall 46a is formed to be bent into two. The hanging wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and can improve the appearance by making the lock member 80 described below invisible when viewed from the front, and further improving the appearance. The lock member 80 is used as a portion to which the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 abuts or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outward from the support protrusion piece 46. Further, the support wedging hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed by being bent so as to be further inclined toward the center of the tip slightly from the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed toward the inner side It is done. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support wedge hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 504.

  Further, the hanging wall 46a described above is formed by being bent at a right angle along the outer edges of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the front inlet end of the support hole 47 and the support hole 47. Is bent inward at the front end of the inlet end portion to form a stop drooping portion 47a. Further, a mounting hole 46b is formed substantially at the center of the support protruding piece 46, and the lock member 80 is rotatably supported by the rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46b. The lock member 80 is molded of synthetic resin, the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and the arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is set up. Further, an attachment hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in the state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support projection 46, as shown in FIG. 14B, the tip contact of the elastic piece 80c The part is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46a, and the stopper part 80a closes the inclined hole part of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80 a does not close the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedge hole 47. That is, in the normal state, a space into which the pivot support pin 504 of the upper pivot support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 47.

  By the way, the state in which the support pin 504 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 and the end side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop drooping portion 47a of the inlet end (in this state In the usual axially supported state where there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a), the support weir 47 formed by bending The respective centers of the pivotal support pin 504 located in the end space portion of the inclined hole portion and the end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a are in a state of being shifted in the diagonal direction and facing each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 504 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 47. Since the load on the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is formed in an arc shape so that the lock member 80 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 80b is operated and rotated. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arc tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support eyelet 47 and abuts on the arc-shaped tip surface 80e, the acting force F is A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the arc-shaped end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arc-shaped end surface 80e, and an inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support hook 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the stopper of the lock member 80 Since the moment for rotating the tip of the portion 80a in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) freed from the support protrusion 46 does not work, the pivot pin 504 has an inclined shape of the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support hook 47 State of being held between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and the elastic integrally formed of synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c, and to prevent the support pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 for a long period of time. Even if the distal end of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 46 by applying an excessive force, one side of the distal end of the stopper 80a Does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 47 a and thus does not rotate further, the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support protrusion 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the center of the arc of the arc-shaped end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80). Although there has been described the case where no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip end face 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced, and the pivoting position of the locking member 80 by the rivet 81 is on the inside of the support projecting piece 46, the pivoting pin 504 inclines the support hook 47 When an acting force F is applied in a direction to come out along the inclination of the hole portion and abuts on the arc-shaped end face 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arc-shaped end face 80f The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) acting on the part, and the component acting on the contact portion between the pivot pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole of the support rod hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment works by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise direction), but even if the lock member 80 rotates, one end of the stopper portion 80a Since only the sides abut the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protrusion 46 and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point which can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 is pulled out along the slope of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. A rotational moment for rotating the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 of the action force F and the end faces 80e and 80f when F is applied and abuts on the end faces 80e and 80f. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where no rotation occurs or a rotational moment causing the tip of the lock member 80 to rotate to the outside of the support protrusion 46 Also, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 80a stops and the hanging portion 47 Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface of the stopper portion 80a is not arc-shaped, the tip of the lock member 80 is directed to the outside of the support projecting piece 46 at a position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component F1. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotational moment to be rotated is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. The applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because only one end of the stopper portion 80a abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a even when 80 rotates. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, the support projections 68 of the lower support fitting 66 in the support holes (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main frame 3. Needs to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 80 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 80c, the pivot pin 504 can be inserted into the support hook hole 47. Then, when the pivotal support pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivotal support pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not abut Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 47 at the same time. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the pivot pin 504 so that the pivot pin 504 does not fall out of the support hook hole 47. Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hook hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 46 so that the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support hook hole 47, so that the support pin 504 is supported. It can be removed from the hole 47. After that, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support projections 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, the upper support fitting 45 can be mounted very easily on the back surface, and since it has an extremely simple structure, it is possible to reduce the number of failures and reduce the manufacturing cost. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 47 and abuts on the tip faces 80e and 80f, the pivotal support pin 504 of the acting force F The tip of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support projection 46 at a position where the rotational moment for rotating the lock member 80 is not generated by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the tip and the tip faces 80e and 80f. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment occurs, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and it is integrally made of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the formed elastic piece 80c and to prevent the support pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 for a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner periphery is in a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp illumination unit 200 attached to the top of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a dish unit 300 attached to the bottom of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100; A glass unit 450 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 to close the game window 101, and a security cover 470 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 to cover the rear lower portion of the glass unit 450 And have. Although the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described in detail later, the left and right sides of the game window 101 are provided with side speaker electronic decoration units 120. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the plate unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 on the left side (open side) of the plate unit 300 in a front view, for performing a game ball hitting operation.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 23 to FIG. FIG. 23 (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit. FIG. 31 (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the joint unit in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame base main body having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically long and polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker electronic decoration unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame 140 made of metal fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. And a ball feeding unit 170 for feeding the game balls fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the tray unit 300 to the ball striking device 650 one by one, fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and The operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting table 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to the lower left decoration substrate 190 fixed to the lower left side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and the ball removing path 393 of the pan unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball removal path cover 191 for closing the ball removal path opening 112 formed in the position, a door decoration drive substrate 192 fixed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 below the game window 101, and a door decoration drive A door decoration drive substrate cover 193 covering the substrate 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal board 194 fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring housing groove 110b formed on the rear side of the housing 110 and capable of containing the wiring from the lower left decorative substrate 190 and the handle relay terminal plate 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 composed of metal sheet metal by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support top lamp electric decoration unit 200, dish unit 300 grade, etc. while being carried out.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs 190a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 so that the left end portion of the plate unit 300 described later can be lighted and decorated. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the electric decoration parts and electric parts (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board etc., the speakers 121 and 391, the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400) provided in the door frame 5. A door relay board in which wiring from the switch, ball unit 301, operation button unit 370, etc. is collected and connected, and wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is mounted on the back surface of the main frame 3 It is connected to a winning ball payout control board 1186 via 1102 and the like, and a main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of a main control board box 624 attached to the game board 4.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 etc. The game window 101 of a shape is formed in the form which offsets upwards generally. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and a width of the left and right side sides, the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 143 The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area wider than conventional pachinko machines can be easily formed. It has become.

  In addition, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, the prize ball passing hole 111 through which the prize ball communication ball 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates on the upper part of the pivoting side (left side in front view) A ball extraction path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball extraction path 393 in the pan unit 300 below the passage opening 111 and a ball feed unit 170 for mounting the ball feed unit 170 on the open side (right side in front view) The feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later is inserted near the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are respectively formed so as to penetrate the door frame base main body 110.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101, the mounting opening 116 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and the left and right mounting opening 116 respectively. A speaker opening 117 for escaping the rear ends of the side speakers 121 disposed on the outer side and below the left and right lower sides of the side speaker illumination unit 120 described later is respectively formed to penetrate.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, the front side peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 is indented to the front side along the inner periphery of the game window 101 and the front outer periphery of the glass unit 450 can contact; A wire receiving groove 110b which is formed on the lower side and formed on the front side at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 and can receive a wire, and the cam insertion opening 115 opens to attach the concave joint unit 180 toward the front And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed to project backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are the main frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585 of the above. The amount of protrusion of the door frame protrusion 110 d to the rear is formed to be larger than the amount of protrusion of the door frame protrusion 110 e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110 h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp illumination unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, in the door frame base main body 110, a large number of mounting bosses for fixing the side speaker illumination unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the plate unit 300, etc., and a large number of mounting holes are formed. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker illumination unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front face of the door frame 5 (light emission decoration) and is disposed at four corners of the game window 101. The left side speaker illumination unit 120L which can emit predetermined music, sound effects, etc. to the player by the side speaker 121, and is arranged on the axis support side (left side in front view) of the gaming window 101. And the right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the game window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes, in each of the left and right units, a vertically long illumination portion 122 and an acoustic portion 130 disposed on the top and bottom of the illumination portion 122 and having a side speaker 121, and the left and right are symmetrical. It is a structure.

  Specifically, as shown in an exploded manner in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination portion 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a longitudinally long semi-cylindrical transparent side illumination lens 123 and a side illumination lens 123. Of the transparent side illumination reflector 124 which is disposed on the rear side of the vehicle and which forms a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123, the side illumination decoration base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124, and The side decoration lens 126 is formed so as to wrap the upper end and the lower end of the side decoration substrate 126 fixed to the rear side, the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 from the front side respectively and attached to the side illumination base 125 Side illumination flash cover 127 supporting the 123 and the side illumination reflector 124, and the side illumination flash cover The flash lens 128 has a light-transmitting property to close the flash opening 127a of the lens 27 from the rear side, and the flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front of the side illumination base 125 .

  The electric decoration part 122 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a capable of emitting various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side electric decoration board 126, and high brightness above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a The white LEDs 126b are mounted respectively. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front and rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration substrate 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on the light source 126 can be emitted forward through the opening 125 a of the side illumination base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side illumination reflector 124.

  In the electric decoration part 122, inside the transparent cylinder of the side electric decoration lens 123 and the side electric decoration reflector 124, the entire inner circumference of the side electric decoration lens 123 and a part of the inner circumference of the side electric decoration reflector 124 As described above, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that makes transmitted light or reflected light appear pearly or colorful, and when viewed from the player side, the side illumination lens 123 is formed by the side lens sheet 123a. And in the transparent cylinder (pipe) formed of the side illumination reflector 124, it can be made to take an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged.

  Furthermore, in the electric decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to several LED126a of the side decoration board | substrate 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 into three groups in an up-down direction The dividing wall 124b is provided to prevent the light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, by the dividing wall 124b, the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 can be clearly divided into three, that is, the upper middle, the lower and the lower one. Therefore, by causing the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decoration substrate 126 to emit light appropriately, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light entirely or partially, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower portions. It is possible to

  Further, in the side illumination reflector 124, a lens recess 124c recessed from the front side is formed at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b in the side decoration substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens from the front side is formed in the lens recess 124c. 122a (see FIG. 28 and FIG. 29) is inserted. The electric decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electric decoration lens 123 and the side electric decoration reflector 124 by making only the LED 126 b emit light strongly before making the LED 126 a emit light by the sub lens 122 a and the LED 126 b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light-emitting effect in which only both ends light up and then light up.

  Furthermore, in the electric decoration part 122, a flash light 129a (for example, super high brightness white LED etc.) capable of emitting strong light is attached to the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side electric decoration flash cover 127 By making the flash light 129a emit light, it is possible to emit a flash to the player side.

  The sound unit 130 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a substantially disc made of a speaker ornament 131 disposed at the foremost portion and having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a, and a punching metal closing the speaker opening 131a of the speaker ornament 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed on the rear side of the speaker cover 132, in cooperation with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and having a circular speaker front support opening 133a, and a speaker of the decoration spacer 133 Mainly provided with a side speaker 121 arranged to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting opening 134a fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side .

  As shown in the figure, in the sound unit 130, the shapes of the speaker decoration 131, the decoration spacer 133, and the back pressing member 134 are different depending on the mounting position. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the sound unit 130 at the upper left in the front view has the speaker decoration 131 formed in a cylindrical shape, and has a decoration portion 131b extending outward from the left side The decorative spacer 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134b to be combined with the decoration part 131b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic portion 130 further includes a hinge cover 135 disposed above the back pressing decorative portion 134 b of the back pressing member 134 and covering the lower side than the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support portion 146 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 There is. Moreover, in the acoustic unit 130 at the lower left in a front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having the decoration part 131 b, and the spacer decoration part 133 b in which the decoration spacer 133 is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131 The back holding member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, in the acoustic section 130 at the upper right in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the acoustic unit 130 at the lower right in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration portion 133b that abuts on the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131 The back holding member 134 is formed in a ring shape. The sound unit 130 at the lower right is further provided with a decorative base 136 on the further rear side of the back pressing member 134, having a back pressing member fixing port 136a through which the back pressing member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front. .

  The four side speakers 121 in the side speaker illumination unit 120 of the present example are disposed at the four corners of the game window 101, as shown in the figure, and for the head of the player who is likely to play the game Are arranged at the top, bottom, left, and right positions, so 2.1ch surround sound signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and a lower speaker 391 described later added to each side speaker 121 are added) By sending a signal or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example mainly takes charge of a mid range to a high range, and the lower speaker 391 takes charge of a low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforcing sheet metal]
Next, as shown mainly in FIGS. 24 and 25, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 is an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the upper side back surface of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 mounted along the back surface of the support side 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 143 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 A lower reinforcing metal plate 144 attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101 is mutually tightened with a screw or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has an upper shaft supporting portion 146 having a shaft pin 145 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 And a lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, whereby the door frame 5 is mounted to the main body frame 3. It is provided to be openable and closable.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edges It is a lower bent piece 149 which is bent backward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent piece 150 which is bent backward at both sides of the upper long side edge is formed. However, a portion sandwiched by the upper bending projections 150 on both sides thereof is a vertical bending projection 151 extended in the vertical direction. Although the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 149 is not very large, and the lower bent protrusion 149 is not engaged with the groove portion or the recessed portion to form the concavo-convex engagement, and is formed to enhance the strength. On the other hand, although the amount of protrusion of the upper bending protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bending protrusions 149, the intrusion of the incorrect tool from the lower part is somewhat prevented, but rather the lower reinforcement in this embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the configuration of the sheet metal 144 is the vertical bending projection 151.

  The vertically bent projecting piece 151 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 The upper end piece of the vertically bent projecting piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451 c formed along the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 in the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-back direction) . In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 is formed which protects the outer periphery of the bottom surface of the prize ball passage hole 111 formed in the door frame base main body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an open side outer bending projection 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 and The open side inner bent pieces 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent pieces 154 are formed to extend rearward more than the open side outer bent pieces 153. Further, on the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141, bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 which are bent backward on both sides of the long side are respectively formed. Furthermore, a bearing side L-shaped bent projecting piece 157 is formed on the bearing side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to extend rearward at the outer end of the long side thereof. In addition, a hook cover 158 that is in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is attached to the rear lower portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting stand, ball feed unit]
Next, the mounting base 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, the mounting table 160 is attached to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100 as shown in FIGS. 18, 24 and 25, and is transparent synthetic resin like the crime prevention cover 470. It is formed in the shape of a long rectangular parallelepiped whose front is open. In order to smoothly guide the balls fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting platform 160 fires by the rear surface of the mounting platform 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. A ball flight guiding surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, in the mounting table 160 according to the present embodiment, an opening 162 for the prize ball passage opening through which the rearward projecting portion of the prize ball passage hole covering portion 152 formed on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated It is formed, and a ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed at the lower side on the open side. An area in an oblique direction from the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guiding surface 161.

  Further, in the middle lower part of the mounting table 160, a cover notch 164 for inserting a finger when removing the ball removal path cover 191, the door decoration drive board 192 and the door decoration drive board cover 193 described later is formed. In addition, on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160, a standing wall 165 which is vertically provided is formed. As shown in FIG. 18, when the security cover 470 is attached, the standing wall 165 abuts against the front surface of the security cover 470 to restrict the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward.

  Further, the mounting table 160 is provided with a security projection 166 which is provided obliquely rearward from the lower side of the above-mentioned ball flight guiding surface 161 to the opening for the ball passing hole 162. As described above, the crime prevention projection 166 and the crime prevention space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 are provided with the inner ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and It constitutes an engaging portion.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 has a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171a of the main body 171. A feed member 172, and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311 c of the pan unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in correspondence with the reciprocation differential of the hitting ball 687 of the hitting and firing device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515 through the strike delivery port 171 b formed in the main body 171.

  In the figure, reference numeral 174 denotes an E ring, which prevents the ball feeding member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171, and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feeding member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Subsequently, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base main body 110 and can slide in the lateral direction in the state where the slide body 182 and the slide body 182 are accommodated. It is comprised from the cover body 184 which covers the front surface of the unit mounting recessed part 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base main body 110 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose front face is open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened on the rear face. Further, a pair of attachment holes 110 f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed at one substantially diagonal corner of the joint unit attachment recess 110 c. Furthermore, on the upper and lower sides of the inner surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c, arc-shaped contact protrusions for contacting the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 to allow the slide body 182 to move smoothly. In FIG. 31 (B), only the contact convex portion 110g on the lower side is shown, and the contact convex portion 110g on the upper side is not shown.

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit attachment recess 110 c so as to be accommodated movably in the left and right direction in the space formed by the joint unit attachment recess 110 c and the cover member 184. It is formed in an open rectangular box shape, and is disposed on the rear surface wall below the two guide projections 182a which project rearward by a predetermined amount and are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction and the guide projections 182a on the right side in rear view A plate-like slide protrusion 183 protruding rearward and a wire through cylinder portion 428 of a handle device 400 described later are pierced on the left side in a rear view with respect to the slide protrusion 183 between the two guide protrusions 182a. And a rectangular cylinder member through opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183 a which is obliquely cut in the traveling direction (right direction in rear view) at the time of sliding. Further, on the front wall of the slide body 182, a cam engaging concave portion 182c in which a cam 416 fixed to the tip end portion of the rotating shaft 415 in the handle device 400 is accommodated is formed in a U shape by a rib. And, a cam contact portion 182d is formed as an arc-shaped rib so that a portion of the vertical part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c protrudes into the cam engagement recess 182c and the portion abuts against the cam 416 It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose front face is open, and a cylindrical boss-like guide projection 182a which is provided on the front face of the slide body 182 is inserted in the front face thereof. Of the two horizontal guide holes 194a for guiding the movement of the slide, the insertion horizontal hole 184b through which the slide projection 183 provided on the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear of the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle portion 410. It projects outward from the position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c which the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 attached to the end and inserted from the cam insertion opening 115 faces and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a formed mounting hole 184d. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit attachment recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the attachment hole 110f of the joint unit attachment recess 110c through the attachment hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit attachment recess 110c, the slide body 182 is accommodated in the joint unit attachment recess 110c, and the cover body 184 is covered from the front in that state. At the time of coating, the guide projection 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. After coating, the slide body 182 is housed inside by screwing the mounting hole 110 f with a screw via the mounting hole 184 d, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2 B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32 (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit from diagonally front and bottom It is. FIG. 34 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) later. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown together with the top lamp base, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the central rotation lamp in the top lamp illumination unit.

  The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, is provided with three rotary lights 244, 264, 284 aligned in the left-right direction, and these rotary lights 244, 264, As for the size of 284, larger ones are arranged in order from the left side in front view. The top lamp illumination unit 200 is fixed to the front of the box-like top lamp base 210 and to the front of the top lamp base 210 and is fixed to the top front of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 in between. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left turn light unit 240 attached to the front of top lamp reflector unit 220, right turn light unit 260, center turn light unit 280, left turn light unit 240, right turn light unit 260, Mainly provided with rotary lamp covers 201, 202 and 203 attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220 respectively covering the front of the central rotary lamp unit 280, and a reflector inner 204 covering the lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit approximately at the center ( See Figure 34)

  The top lamp illumination unit 200 further includes a top lamp power supply substrate 205 fixed to the front right of the top lamp base 210, and two top lamp decoration driving substrates 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. It is further equipped. The top lamp power supply substrate 205 includes the substrates 224, 226 and 231 and the LEDs 244a, 266a and 231a in the top lamp illumination unit 200, the motors 245, 265 and 285 of the rotary light units 240, 260 and 280, and the substrates 248. , 268, 288, and 296, and an LED 453a of a glass unit 450, which will be described later, is relayed to supply power from a power supply substrate 1136 (described later). In addition, the top lamp decoration drive substrate 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, the motors 245, 265, 285 of the respective rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. Driving is to be driven based on a control signal from a peripheral substrate 4010 (peripheral control substrate 4140) described later.

[1-2 B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right sides substantially follow the upper side and the left and right sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the game window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape which is horizontally long and partitioned at the middle in the front-rear direction. The mounting boss 110h of the door frame base main body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery of the top lamp base 210, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i protrudes rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the front side. A plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting bosses 211 each having an insertion hole through which a predetermined screw can be inserted. The tip of the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted from the rear into the mounting boss portion 211, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. Is fixed to the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side of the upper lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp illumination unit 200) is mounted and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  In addition, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed bosses 212 having an insertion hole through which a predetermined screw can pass while the rear end of the fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 is engaged. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixing boss 221 j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side via the fixing boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other It has become.

  Furthermore, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply substrate 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end in front view. Is viewed from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further, on the left and right of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, substrate mounting portions 214 are respectively provided, and to the substrate mounting portion 214, the top lamp decoration driving substrate 206 is mounted.

[1-2 B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Subsequently, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of this embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 which can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front and is open at the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder in which three rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 are mounted side by side on the front surface, and a large space is projected forward between the central rotary lamp 284 and the left and right rotary lamps 244, 264. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b which descends downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines rearward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical portion 221a, and in the inclined portion 221b, three rectangular openings aligned in the vertical direction are formed (see FIG. 33). ). Further, the reflector base 210 is provided with vertically elongated bulging portions 221e that project forward at the left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f is formed at the front surface of the bulging portion 221e to be vertically elongated. As illustrated, the reflector base 211 is shaped such that the mounting positions of the three rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 are recessed rearward by the two cylindrical parts 221a and the inclined parts 221b and the two bulging parts 221e. It has become.

  Further, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape in which the space between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (the position where the central rotation lamp 284 is disposed) is recessed rearward, and Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening 221g penetrating substantially trapezoidal in a front view is formed on the left and right across the approximate center in the left-right direction. Further, the reflector base 221 is provided with a rotary lamp mounting so that the front ends of the rotary lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 provided with the rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221 h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 221i that project rearward and which engage with the mounting bosses 211 of the top lamp base 210 and a plurality of bosses that engage with the fixed bosses 212 of the top lamp base 210 and project backwards. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with a mounting boss 221k directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without the top lamp base 210.

  The top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 fixed to a substantially central position in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lenses 222. A pair of lens sheet 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted on the front, a reflector base 210 The transparent round lens 225 inserted from the rear side into the cylindrical portion 221a in the rear to close the opening 221c, and the rear side of the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a placed on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin, and has three curved lens portions 222a, which are substantially trapezoidal and curved and closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and three inclined portions 221b of the reflector base 221. It comprises a divided lens portion 222 b for closing the opening 221 d and a round lens support portion 222 c in contact with the rear end of the round lens 225. In addition, while the diffused lens part 222d of the shape of a saw is formed in the upper and lower sides of the curved lens part 222a, while being able to emit light in the aspect different from the curved lens part 222a, the light from the front side Can be diffusely reflected.

  In the top inner lens 222, a projection piece 222e which protrudes in a plate shape from the rear side to the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d and an upper and lower projection pieces support the lens sheet 223 behind the curved lens portion 222a. A support recess 222f is formed. As illustrated, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged in a row corresponding to the projecting pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Thus, the curved lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222 and the diffusion lens portion 222d can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that shows transmitted light from the LED 224 a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources and the like in a pearl shape or a colorful shape. Also, the LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration substrate 226 is an ultra-high brightness LED, and can emit strong flash light.

  Furthermore, in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top side lens 227 closing the vertically long slits 221f formed in the left and right bulging portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and the top side fixing the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side A lens holder 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 which is fixed on the rear side of the reflector base 221 to hold the lens sheet 229 And a top side substrate 231 on the front surface of which is mounted a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the top side lens 227 on the front side via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed of a transparent resin in a V shape in plan view, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at the upper and lower ends respectively, and the locking piece 227b at the lower end is a reflector base After being locked with the lower end of the slit 221 f at 221, the locking piece 227 a at the upper end is attached to the reflector base 221 by pressing it with the top side lens presser 228. Further, the lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the above-mentioned lens sheet 223, and is also formed in a curved shape as shown in FIG. By being attached to 221, it is possible to take on the appearance that a cylindrical fluorescent tube is disposed behind the top side lens 227.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and the light from the LED 231 a of the top side substrate 231 fixed to the rear side through the inside of the frame is the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be emitted to the front surface through the lens 227.

[1-2 B-3. Rotating light unit]
Next, three rotary light units 240, 260, 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotation lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241 a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the position where the opening 241 a protrudes to the front side from the rotation lamp attachment opening 221 h of the reflector base 221 The rotary lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and the substantially annular rotation arranged coaxially with the opening 241 a of the rotary lamp unit base 241 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 241. A rotary lamp base gear 243 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 242 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 242 and its lower surface so as to hang from the rotary lamp base gear 243 And the rotary lamp attachment opening 221 of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotary lamp base gear 243. Left rotation light motor 245 and left rotation light motor which are arranged on the rear side of the axis and fixed to the lower surface of rotation light unit base 241 so that rotation shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of rotation light unit base 241 A transmission gear 246 fixed to the rotary shaft 245a of the H.245 and engaged with the rotary lamp base gear 243, covering the whole of the rotary lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmission gear 246 from above and rotating the rotary lamp base gear 243 , And is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 247 coaxially with the rotating part holder 247 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and heading toward the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left-turning lamp substrate 248 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotation light unit 240 has a rotation light unit cover 249 covering the rotation part holder 247 from above, a left rotation position detection sensor 250 for detecting the rotation position of the rotation light 244, and a left rotation position detection sensor 250. And a left rotational position detection substrate 251.

  The rotary lamp unit base 241 of the left rotary lamp unit 240 descends downward at a position on the upper side of the opening 241a and a mounting step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a. It has an attachment portion 241c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211, and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a and fixing the left rotary light motor 245, and rotates from above in the attachment step 241b. The part base 242 is fitted. In addition, the rotational portion base 242 detects the left rotational position at a predetermined position on the shaft support port 242 a having a small diameter coaxially with the opening 241 a of the rotary lamp unit base 241 and the outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 243 outside the outer periphery. A substrate support portion 242b supporting the lower end of the substrate 251, and a wire locking portion 242c disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and locking a wire connected to the left rotary lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear whose outer diameter is larger than the shaft support port 242 a of the rotary unit base 242, extends downward from the lower surface, and is a shaft support port 242 a of the rotary unit base 242. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 243a that is vertically smaller and smaller than the gear barrel, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the pivot support 242a of the rotary portion base 242, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the pivot support 242a. The shaft 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support 242a. Further, in the left rotation lamp unit 240, by detecting the rotation position detection piece 243b of the rotation lamp base gear 243 by the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the rotation position of the rotation lamp 244 can be detected. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 247 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the pivot support opening 242a of the rotary unit base 242 and can be inserted into the pivot support hole 243a of the rotary light base gear 243. The holder barrel of is formed. The outside diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder barrel into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary lamp base gear 243, the rotary lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the left rotation lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotation lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 242a of the rotation portion base 242, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotation lamp base gear 243 and the shaft support hole 243a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotation portion holder 247. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotation lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotation portion holder 247. Further, although not shown, a substrate support portion for supporting the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 is formed on the lower surface of the rotation portion holder 247 at a position corresponding to the substrate support portion 242b of the rotation portion base 242 thereof. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is held and fixed by the rotating portion base 242 and the rotating portion holder 247.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotary lamp 244 of the left rotary lamp unit 240 is arranged below the transparent disk-shaped rotary lamp lens 252 disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 243, and below the rotary lamp lens 252. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotary lamp 244 is plated on the surface with metallic luster, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b bored in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d which extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 243.

  In the rotary lamp 244, the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 252 faces from the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotary lamp lens 252 is formed with an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 253d into the insertion hole 252a and fixing the mounting boss 253d to the rotary lamp base gear 243, the rotary lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotary lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is supposed to be held fixed. Further, the reflector cover 254 of the rotary lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on a side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253 c in the reflector 253 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotation lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a protrudes to the front side from the rotation lamp attachment opening 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221 The rotary lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be at the same position, and the substantially circle disposed coaxially with the opening 261 a of the rotary lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 261 An annular rotary unit base 262, a rotary lamp base gear 263 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 262 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 262, and hanging from the rotary lamp base gear 263 The rotary lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the rotary lamp mounting of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotary lamp base gear 263 A right rotation light motor 265 disposed on an axis line on the rear side of 221 h and fixed to the lower surface of the rotation light unit base 261 such that the rotation shaft 265 a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation light unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotation shaft 265 a of the motor 265 and engaged with the rotary light base gear 263, covering the whole rotary light base gear 263 and a part of the transmission gear 266 from above and rotating the rotary light base gear 263 The rotary unit holder 267, which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to the rotary lamp unit base 261, is fixed to the lower surface of the rotary unit holder 267 coaxially with the rotary lamp base gear 263 and is directed to the lower rotary lamp 264 And a right-turning light substrate 268 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting toward the light.

  In addition, the right rotation light unit 260 includes a rotation light unit cover 269 that covers the rotation unit holder 267 from above, a right rotation position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotation position of the rotation light 264, and a right rotation position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection substrate 271.

  The rotary lamp unit base 261 of the right rotary lamp unit 260 has a mounting stepped portion 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a in the upper surface thereof, and descends downward at a position rearward of the opening 261a. A mounting portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d disposed on the rear side of the opening 261a and fixing the right rotation light motor 265 are provided, and the mounting step portion 261b rotates from above The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotation portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the shaft support port 262a coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotary lamp unit base 261 and having a small diameter on the outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 263 A substrate support portion 262b supporting the lower end of the substrate 271; and a wire locking portion 262c disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and locking a wire connected to the right rotary lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than the shaft support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 263a that is smaller in diameter than the gear barrel and penetrates vertically, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And 263b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the spindle support 262a of the rotary portion base 262, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the spindle support 262a. H. 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the shaft support 262a. Further, in the right rotation lamp unit 260, the rotation position of the rotation lamp 264 can be detected by detecting the rotation position detection piece 263b of the rotation lamp base gear 263 by the right rotation position detection sensor 270. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 267 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the pivot support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262 and can be inserted into the pivot support hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263. The holder barrel of is formed. The outer diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the bearing hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder barrel into the bearing hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263, the rotary lamp can be turned. The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the right rotation lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotation lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 262a of the rotation portion base 262, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotation lamp base gear 263 and the shaft support hole 263a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotation portion holder 267. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotation lamp base 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotation portion holder 267. Further, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 267 is provided with a substrate support unit for supporting the upper end of the right rotational position detection substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 262b of the rotary unit base 262 on the lower surface thereof. The right rotation position detection substrate 271 is nipped and fixed by the rotating portion base 262 and the rotating portion holder 267.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotary lamp 264 of the right rotary lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotary lamp 244 of the left rotary lamp unit 240, and is a transparent disc-like member disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 263. The rotary lamp lens 272, the reflector 273 disposed under the rotary lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 263, and the reflector cover 274 covering the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotary lamp 264 is plated on the surface with metallic luster, and has a disk-like base 273a, an opening 273b bored in the center of the base 273a, and a base 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d which can extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 263.

  In the rotary lamp 264, the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 272 faces from the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotary lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 273d into the insertion hole 272a and fixing the mounting boss 273d to the rotary lamp base gear 263, the rotary lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotary lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is supposed to be held fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotary lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on a side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c in the reflector 273 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is the front side from the rotary lamp attachment opening 221h at the center in the horizontal direction of the reflector base 221. The rotary lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be projected to the same position and coaxially with the opening 281 a of the rotary lamp unit base 281 is fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281 A substantially circular annular rotary unit base 282, a rotary lamp base gear 283 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 282 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 282 and suspended from the rotary lamp base gear 283 And the rotation of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotation lamp base gear 283. A central rotary lamp motor 285 disposed on an axis line on the rear side of the lamp attachment opening 221h and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281 so that the rotary shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 fixed to the rotation shaft 285 a of the central rotation light motor 285 and engaged with the rotation light base gear 283, covering the entire rotation light base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 from above and The rotary unit holder 287 is supported in cooperation with the rotary unit base 282 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary unit holder 287 coaxially with the rotary unit holder 287 coaxially with the rotary lamp base gear 283 and fixed to the rotary lamp unit base 281. And a central rotary lamp substrate 288 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light toward the lamp 284.

  In addition, the central rotary light unit 280 includes a rotary light unit cover 289 covering the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 for detecting the rotational position of the rotary light 284 and a central rotational position detection sensor 290 And a central rotational position detection substrate 291.

  The rotary lamp unit base 281 of the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a mounting stepped portion 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a in the upper surface thereof, and descends downward at a position rearward of the opening 281a. A mounting portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d disposed on the rear side of the opening 281a and fixing the central rotary light motor 285 are provided. The part base 282 is fitted. Further, the rotational portion base 282 detects a central rotational position at a predetermined position of an axial support port 282 a having a small diameter coaxially with the opening 281 a of the rotary lamp unit base 281 and an outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 283 outside the outer periphery. A substrate support portion 282b supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; a wire locking portion 282c disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and locking a wire connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear whose outer diameter is larger than the shaft support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282, extends downward from the lower surface, and is a shaft support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 283a that is smaller in diameter than the gear barrel and penetrates vertically, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And 283b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the axial support port 282a of the rotary portion base 282, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the axial support port 282a. A shaft 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the shaft support 282a. Further, in the central rotary light unit 280, the rotational position of the rotary light 284 can be detected by detecting the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotary light base gear 283 by the central rotational position detection sensor 290. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the axial support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282 and can be inserted into the axial support hole 283 a of the rotary lamp base gear 283. The holder barrel of is formed. The outer diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the bearing hole 283a of the rotary lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder barrel into the bearing hole 283a of the rotary lamp base gear 283, the rotary lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the central rotary lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotary lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 282 a of the rotary portion base 282, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 283 and the shaft support hole 283 a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotary unit holder 287. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotary lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotary unit holder 287. Further, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit for supporting the upper end of the central rotational position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotary unit base 282 on the lower surface thereof. The central rotational position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed by the rotary unit base 282 and the rotary unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the size of the rotary light 294 of the central rotary unit 280 is set to an intermediate size between the rotary light 244 of the left rotary light unit 240 and the rotary light 264 of the right rotary light unit 260, A transparent disk-shaped rotary lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotary lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 covering the The reflector 293 of the rotary lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening 293b bored in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 283.

  The rotary lamp 284 is configured such that the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 292 faces from the opening 293 b of the reflector 293, and the rotary lamp lens 292 is formed with an insertion hole 292 a through which the mounting boss 293 d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 293 d into the insertion hole 292 a and fixing the mounting boss 293 d to the rotary lamp base gear 283, the rotary lamp lens 292 is narrow between the rotary lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is supposed to be held fixed. The reflector cover 294 of the rotary lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on the side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c in the reflector 293 294a is formed.

  By the way, as shown in the figure, the central rotary lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of side surfaces formed on the front three sides of the rotary lamp unit cover 289 between the rotary unit holder 287 and the rotary lamp unit cover 289. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted from the rear side into the notch 289a, and a cover decoration substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted on the surface It is further equipped. The lower end of the cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are respectively supported by the grooved lens support portion 287 a and the substrate support portion 287 b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287. The upper end is supported by the grooved lens support portion and the substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, by emitting the LED of the cover decoration substrate 296, the front end of the rotary light unit cover 289 of the central rotary light unit 280 can be lighted and decorated.

[1-2 C. Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 40 is a front perspective view of the pan unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the pan unit. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the disc back plate of the pan unit removed, and FIG. 45 is a rear perspective view showing the disc back plate of the pan unit and the ball holding unit removed. Further, FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the pan unit divided into main component parts from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the rear. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body in the dish unit from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removing mechanism in the pan unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball extracting mechanism in the pan unit from behind. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the pan unit with the operation button unit substrate of the operation button unit removed. FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the pan unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion and the joint unit constituting the handle device, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Furthermore, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting and launching device provided on the main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a striking-ballistic launch apparatus. Further, FIG. 62A is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls in the dish unit, and FIG. 62B is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of gaming balls in the dish unit. It is. Further, FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a laterally long ball inlet and a storage pan in the pan unit.

  The dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can be paid out from a winning ball unit 800 described later and can store gaming balls, and a hit ball launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 170 the stored gaming balls. Can be supplied to As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plate unit 300 is open at the top and the back and covers the plate 310 having a storage plate 311 capable of storing a predetermined amount of gaming balls, and covers the front of the plate 310. A first ball removing mechanism capable of discharging all of the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 of the plate unit main body 320, the plate unit main body 320, and the plate back plate 340 covering the rear surface of the plate 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage plate of the tray 310 and discharging it, and a ball lending machine (CR unit not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 And an operation button unit 370 fixed to the upper surface of the dish 310 and operable by the player according to the gaming state (playing situation), and the dish unit main body 320 below the dish 310. dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower speaker 391 larger than the side speakers 121 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right corner of the plate unit main body 320 in a front view It mainly includes a handle base 303 disposed, and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover which covers electric wiring connected to the dish electric decoration board 336 in the dish unit main body 320 described later. Further, as shown in the drawing, on the left side in a front view of the back plate 340, a lower left decorative substrate 190 for emitting and decorating the left end of the plate unit main body 320 is disposed.

  The ball unit 301 in the plate unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the plate back plate 340 substantially at the center in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and is arranged beside the ball button 301a and the ball button 301a. A return button 301b and a loan remaining indicator (not shown) disposed between the rental ball button 301a and the return button 301b and displaying the number of remaining cash and prepaid cards on the ball lending machine are provided. In this ball lending unit 301, after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and pressing the ball lending button 301a, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be put into the bowl unit 300 Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the storage tray 311, and when the return button 301b is pressed, the remaining amount of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder or prepaid card inserted is returned There is.

  The main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the plate unit 300 are used when the player participates in the game content (game effect) performed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like provided on the game board 4. It is an operation.

[1-2C-1. Dish]
First, as shown in the drawing, the tray 310 in the tray unit 300 has a storage tray 311 of a predetermined depth which is approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view and is opened upward and backward, and in the storage tray 311. A second ball outlet 312 disposed at a predetermined position in the bottom and penetrating in the vertical direction, continuing from the right end of the storage tray 312 to the storage tray 311 and being disposed downstream of the third inclined surface 311 c The first ball pulling path 313 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) capable of guiding the game ball to almost directly below the second ball pulling opening 312 and the upper right side of the storage plate 311 in a substantially rhombic shape The operation button unit mounting recess 314 to which the button unit 370 can be attached, and the first ball releasing button 351 of the first ball removing mechanism 350 is opened in a substantially circular shape on the rear side of the operation button unit mounting recess 314 Ball withdrawal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage dish 311 in the dish 310 is disposed on the front of the ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a which is lowered toward the right and front in plan view, and the right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b which is continuous with the rear of the head and lowers toward the right and the rear, and a right end of the second inclined surface 311b is continuous toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340 An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d which is continuous with a front portion of the right end of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end of the second inclined surface 311b and which is lowered toward the right and the second inclined surface 311b; And a fifth inclined surface 311e which is continuous with the right end of the four inclined surfaces 311d and which becomes lower toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43 and the like).

  In addition, the storage plate 311 is disposed between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c, with the partition wall 311f rising upward from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e and incapable of crossing the gaming ball. And a sixth inclined surface 311g which is lowered toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is disposed between the first inclined surface 311 a and the second inclined surface 311 b. Also, the second ball outlet 312 is normally in a closed state by the second ball extracting shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of the present embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half of the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as illustrated. The second inclined surface 311 b has a pentagonal shape such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1⁄4 of the length of the storage tray 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311 c The third inclined surface 311 c has a horizontally long zoning shape in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the fourth inclined surface 311 d has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the length of the second inclined surface 311 b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311 b. Furthermore, the fifth inclined surface 311 e extends from the left end to a right direction from the left end by a predetermined distance substantially in parallel with the third inclined surface 311 c and then extends obliquely toward the rear third inclined surface 311 c The partition wall 311f extends along the third inclined surface 311c with the front end (right end) extending rearward toward the right end of the rear end, as a whole, as a whole. It is formed in reverse character shape, and the partition wall 311f is formed along the rear side end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage tray 311 includes the left end and the front end of the first inclined surface 311 a, the front end of the fourth inclined surface 311 d, and the front end of the fifth inclined surface (right end The storage tray 311 is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the tray 310 by the outer peripheral wall 311h. Further, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that is directed forward as it goes to the right at the front end of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the gaming ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 onto the first inclined surface 311a abuts against the position facing the ball inlet 341 on the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. It distributes on five inclined surfaces 311d. In addition, the fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope where the gaming balls having flowed into the storage plate 311 from the ball inlet 341 can be climbed up, and the direction thereof is after climbing to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e. To change in the direction (left direction) of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example allows the gaming ball, which has flowed in from the ball inlet 341, to once divert to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flows to the third inclined surface 311c serving as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g of the storage tray 311 has a steep inclination angle as compared with the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of gaming balls are arranged on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. The ball supply port 342 can be easily aligned in a line in the left-right direction. A stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls, and to charge the static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion descends downward and descends downward to the rear right side. It is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball removal path 313, and by being continuous with the first ball removal path 313, a flow path that is folded back in the left-right direction is formed. At the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removal path 313, the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. The ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340 is opened as desired for the slide 356. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down the third inclined surface 311 c are distributed to the ball supply port 342 by blocking the flow down by the first ball removal slide 356.

  In the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 310, the first ball is placed on the side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction, and a first ball to be described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313 with the slide groove 316a interposed therebetween. A flange portion 316 b for locking the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Dish unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the plate unit main body 320 in the plate unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the plate unit 300, covers the front surface of the plate body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and backward. A box-shaped main body portion 321 is provided. The main body portion 321 is configured such that about 3/4 of the left side in a front view bulges forward, and the lower speaker unit 390 is housed inside (rear side) of the bulged portion It has become. Further, the main body portion 321 has a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 at the center right of the front surface of the bulging portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball release button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed to penetrate therethrough. Furthermore, in the main body portion 321, an oval handle base attachment port 321d for attaching the handle base 303 to the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e disposed above the handle base attachment port 321d and facing a cylinder lock 1010 described later. And a duct-shaped duct opening 321f that opens on the right side surface of a portion bulging forward on the left side of the handle base attachment port d, and a compartment-shaped ball discharge port 321g that opens to a lower portion substantially in the left-right direction. Have.

  In the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300, the front back plate 322 which covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body 321 from the front side, and the speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 A plate-like right cover 323 arranged on the front corresponding to the speaker opening 321a and made of punching metal and cut off at four corners, and arranged substantially in the center of the front of the right cover 323 smaller than the right cover 323 and having a metallic luster on the surface Of the plate-shaped right ornament base 324 which has been plated, the right ornament 325 which is disposed approximately at the center of the front of the right ornament base 324 and is smaller than the right ornament base 324 and the main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-shaped plate which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321 and which is made of punching metal and whose four corners are cut off The left cover 326 and a plate-like left decoration base 327 which is disposed approximately at the center of the front of the left cover 326 and smaller in size than the left cover 326 and plated with metallic luster, and the front of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape which is disposed substantially at the center and which is smaller than the left decoration base 327 and has a plate-like left decoration 328 and the periphery of the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321 And a front main body 329 of the A plurality of through holes 322a penetrating the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 so as to be seen are formed in the front back plate 322 of the plate unit main body 320, and the through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decoration base 323 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be favorably transmitted to the outside through (not shown).

  Further, the plate unit main body 320 of this example is fixed to the front left of the main body 321 with the main left decoration base 330 fixed on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190 and the front of the main left decoration base 330 and plated with metallic luster It further has a main body left decoration 331 subjected to processing. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can emit light and decoration by the LED 190 a of the lower left decoration substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321, and a duct notch 333a where the duct cover faces from the surface; It further includes a main body right decoration 333 which covers the entire right side surface of the portion bulging forward in the portion 321 and is plated with a metallic luster on the surface.

  Further, the pan unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a disposed along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 having a metallic luster plated surface. An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guiding part 335a disposed in the main body part 321 below the main body decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body decoration 334, and arranged under the upper decoration lens 335 And a dished electric decoration board 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED 336a of the dish electric decoration board 336, the decoration on the main body decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be lighted and decorated through the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, etc., the back plate 340 of the plate unit 300 is entirely formed in a horizontally long plate shape, disposed in the upper left corner in a front view and having a horizontally long segment shape in the front-rear direction The ball inlet 341 penetrating through, the ball supply port 342 arranged at a predetermined distance away from the ball inlet 341 in the lower right direction and through which gaming balls can pass, and the rear in communication with the ball inlet 341 Mainly equipped with a square cylinder-shaped award ball contact 343 extending to the end. The ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340 is opened toward the inside of the storage plate 311 of the plate 310 as shown in FIG. 43 and the like, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311 a of the storage plate 311 The length is approximately the same as the length of the Further, the ball supply port 342 is disposed at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c of the storage tray 311 at a position corresponding to the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. In addition, the prize ball contact 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341, and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. It has a length, and the rear end penetrates the prize ball passage port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 to communicate with the outlet 921 of the lower end (front end) of the flow lower end (front end) of the front guiding passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  Further, the back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the winning ball communication ball 343 is reserved a predetermined amount rearward with respect to the ball inlet 341, and between the ball flow hole 341 and the winning ball communication ball 343. Further, the ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 which extends along the entire length in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341 and through which gaming balls can flow. The game ball having circulated the prize ball communication box 343 can be made to flow into the downstream side of the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311 by the shelf portion 344.

  Furthermore, the back plate 340 corresponds to the ball removal path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the ball flow path opening 345 penetrating in a substantially L shape and the ball flow at the upper left of the ball removal path opening 345 in front view And a latch opening 346 disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and through which the rear end of the latch unit 366 of the second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted. Between the ball insertion port 347 disposed in the upper right corner and penetrating in a substantially sectioned shape in a front view and the ball inlet 341 and the wiring insertion port 346, the ball unit 301 is disposed on the upper side of the back plate 340 And a ball unit mounting portion 348 for the game.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, as shown in FIG. 44, FIG. 45, FIG. 50, etc., the first ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 includes a first ball removing button 351 pressed by the player and a first ball removing button 351. A first ball release button base 352 slidably supported in the vertical direction and inserted from below to the first ball removal button mounting port 315 of the bowl 310, and a plate on the top of the first ball removal button base 352 Supported by the first ball release button decoration 353 to which the first ball release button 351 is fixed so as to protrude upward with the body 310 interposed, the first ball release button decoration 353 and the first ball release button base 352 Shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball drawing mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 311 which is the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in a front view of the lower end of the first ball drawing button 351 354 times Inverted L-shaped first ball-extracting crank 355 in which one end is brought into contact with the lower end of the first ball-extracting button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first ball-extracted crank 355 The first lower end of the plate body 311 is slidably supported substantially in the left-right direction by the first lower end mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 311 and the third inclined surface 311 c of the disc body 310 and the first open path 313 And a first ball removing spring 357 for urging the first ball removing crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 can be slid in the left-right direction by being inserted into the slide groove 316 a of the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 in the disc body 310. In this state, by rotating the first ball removing crank 355, the lower end on the other end side of the first ball removing crank 355 is slid in the left-right direction. When the first ball removing slide 356 slides in the left-right direction, the tip end portion advances and retracts into the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish 310 and the first ball removing path 313. The game ball having flowed through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342 by advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, and the flow path is set back from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls distributed in the third inclined surface 311 c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball release spring 357 is engaged with the first ball release crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball release button 351 with the pivot shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A ridge portion 355a is formed. The first ball release spring 357 has its upper end locked to the flange 355a of the first ball release crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball release mechanism support 316 in the disc body 310. By stopping the first ball removing crank 355, the position at which the first ball removing slide 356 closes the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313, and the first ball removing button 351 is the most It can be biased to turn in the direction of the raised position.

  In this first ball removing mechanism 350, when the player presses the first ball removing button 351, the first ball removing crank 355 is in contact with the lower end portion of the first ball removing button 351 via the contact pin 355b. Rotates against the biasing force of the first ball release spring 357 so that one end moves downward, and the other end moves away from the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removal path 313. Move to Then, the first ball removing slide 356 moves along with the lower end of the first ball removing crank 355 in a direction away from the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removing path 313, and the tip of the first ball removing slide 356 The third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball pulling path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from within the flow path of the boundary portion, and all gaming balls in the third inclined surface 311 c, ie, the storage plate 311, are It can discharge | emit outside via the removal path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removing button 351 is released, the first ball removing crank 355 is rotated by the biasing force of the first ball removing spring 357, and the first ball removing button 351 is raised, and the first ball is released. The tip of the extraction slide 356 advances into the flow path of the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball extraction path 313 to close the flow path, and on the third inclined surface 311 c (in the storage tray 311). The game balls can be supplied to the ball striking device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removing mechanism 360 in the plate unit 300 is a second ball projecting forward from the second ball removing button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the plate unit main body 320. A second ball removal slide 362 supported by a lower speaker unit 390 (described later) slidably supported by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and a front and rear of the second ball removal slide 362. Rod-shaped second ball removing crank 363 which is pivotally supported about the shaft extending in the left and right direction by the lower speaker unit 390 by the lower speaker unit 390 and the disc body 310 by the rotation of the second ball removing crank 363 Pivoting about an axis extending vertically between a closed position closing the second ball outlet 312 and an open position opening the second ball outlet 312 A second ball release spring 364 for urging the second ball release shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball release opening 312 is closed, and a second ball release spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball release shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal opening 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball release shutter 364 A second ball-scissoring base 367 having a portion 367a and fixed to the lower side of the tray 310, slidably holding the rear end of the second ball-sliding slide 362, and supporting the latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removing mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) rotatably supporting the second ball removing crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removing slide 362 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a which is opened upward at the rear end and into which the lower end of the second ball removing crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes backward from the rear end An engagement protrusion 362 b engageable with the engagement claw 366 a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removing crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion thereof is inserted from above into the transmission groove 362 a of the second ball removing slide 362 and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390. When the second ball removing slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362 a, and the second ball removing crank 363 rotates. The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 is moved in the opposite direction to the lower end portion.

  In addition, the second ball removing shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removing slide 362 as shown, and the second ball removing port 312 of the disc body 310 and the opening 367 a of the second ball removing base 367 are A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) planar viewable closeable plate-shaped closing portion 364a and a rod-shaped buttock extending from the closing portion 364a to one side in the left-right direction (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51) And 364b, and is formed in a substantially P shape as a whole. In addition, while the tip of the collar portion 364b is pivotally supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction by the disc body 310 and the second ball drain base 367, the second ball lift shutter 364 is rotatably supported by the collar portion 364b. An upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 abuts on a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction on the rear side of the second ball removal crank. Further, the front end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is engaged with the rear base end portion of the collar portion 364 b of the second ball release shutter 364. Although the illustration is omitted, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked to the locking boss which is suspended downward from the lower surface of the disc body 310. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to be in the closed position (the position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal opening 312.

  In addition, the second ball removing base 367 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 can pass the upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 between the opening 367 a and the position at which the second ball removing shutter 364 is pivotally supported. The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 axially supported on the lower side of the second ball removing base 367 through the slit 367 b is provided with a slit 367 b extending in the front-rear direction, the upper surface of the second ball removing base 367 It can come in contact with the collar portion 364b of the second ball release shutter 364 disposed at the In addition, the second ball removing base 367 is formed in a shallow plate shape as shown in the figure, and can be formed with the plate body 310 so as to form a storage space for storing the second ball removing shutter 364. There is. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball release shutter 364 is smaller and lower than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the second ball release shutter 364 is pivoted to make the second ball release opening 312 The game ball is prevented from entering between the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 even when the is in the open state.

  In the second ball removing mechanism 360 of this embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removing button 361 projecting forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removing slide 362 slides backward, and The second ball removing crank 363 is rotated such that the lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 is moved rearward while being guided by the transmission groove 362 a of the double ball removing slide 362. Then, by rotating the second ball removing crank 363, the upper end moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end, and the second ball removing shutter 364 abuts on the upper end of the second ball removing crank 363. However, against the biasing force of the second ball removing spring 365, the closing portion 364a is pivoted to move forward about the tip of the collar portion 364b. Thus, when the closing portion 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the disc 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 is opened. The gaming ball stored on the upstream side of the tray unit 300 is discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball opening 312.

  The second ball removing mechanism 360 of the present embodiment is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second ball removing button 361 is pushed to engage the engaging projections 362b at the rear end of the second ball removing slide 362 with the latch unit 366 as a pair. When it abuts between the engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a close and engage so as to sandwich the engaging projection 362b, and the second ball removing spring 365 resists the biasing force of the second ball removing spring A state in which the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in an open (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball outlet shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 is opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusion 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 The closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 can be returned to the position for closing the second ball removal opening 312.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the plate unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310 in the plate unit 300 as shown in FIGS. A pair of an octagonal main button 371 with four corners cut off in a plan view and a left subbutton 372L and a right subbutton 372R in a plan view disposed symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371, respectively. The sub button 372, the operation button unit base 373 which holds the main button 371 and the sub button 372 slidably in the vertical direction and is inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and Plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface, and operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  Further, the operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 for detecting the operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L for detecting the operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub for detecting the operation of the right sub button 372R. And a button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub-button sensor 377L, and the right sub-button sensor 377L are each a photo sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and are fixed at predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375. .

  The operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a main button receiving recess 373a which has a substantially rhombic shape in plan view and can receive the main button 371 from above, and a main button receiving portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b formed on the inner peripheral surface and extending in the vertical direction, the upper part of which is opened to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed on the bottom of the main button recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d for guiding light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 which is opened with a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a and which is disposed below, The button 372 is formed at a diagonal corner of the major axis with a pair of sub-button receiving recesses 373e that can receive the button 372 from above. Plate-like top plate portion 373g forming the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and plate-like drooping so as to surround the outer periphery from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g A side wall portion 373 h is mainly provided.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is opened by the top plate portion 373g and the side wall portion 373h, and a plurality of main button accommodation concave portions 373a are formed at predetermined positions of the top plate portion 373g. Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub button accommodation recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. Further, in the operation button unit base 373, the main button housing recess portion 373a is formed thick in a portion where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are enhanced. At the same time, the respective light guide openings 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a are formed in a cylindrical shape which is long in the vertical direction, respectively, even by the outer peripheral wall of these cylindrical light guide openings 373d. The main button receiving recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 forms an upper surface of the main button 371 and supports the main button lens 371a having translucency, and the main button lens 371a, and a cylinder whose upper and lower sides are opened. -Shaped main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder which wraps around the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via a mounting screw 371d And 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 abuts on the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end abuts on the bottom surface of the main button recess 373a of the operation button unit base 373 The main button spring 371 is biased to move upward.

  The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape whose plan view is octagonal and the lower surface is open, and the front surface side is smooth, while a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back surface side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be widely diffused, and the entire surface of the main button 370 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, the main button base 371b has an outer shape on the upper end side of the octagonal shape similar to that of the main button lens 371 as shown in the figure, but a conical shape in which the lower end side narrows downward from the substantially middle part in the vertical direction. The lower end portion of the operation button base 373 extends downward from the opening 373c formed in the bottom of the main button receiving recess 373a and directly above the LED 375a group disposed at the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. It can be located in The main button base 371b includes main locking claws 371f extending downward from two opposing sides, and a plurality of vertically extending guide ribs inserted into the guide grooves 373b of the operation button unit base 373. It has 371g. When the main locking claw 371 f of the main button base 371 b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373 a of the operation button unit base 373, the main button 371 is a main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button receiving recess 373a from coming out by the biasing force of the key.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured to be able to attach the vibrating body 371c to the inside of one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, Inside, a detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed.

  When the main button 371 in this example is pressed downward against the biasing force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371h of the main button base 371b is between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the main button sensor 376. The operation is detected by the main button sensor 376. Further, when the main button 371 detects an operation by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is operated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. As well as being able to recognize that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the main button 371. A light shielding plate 375b is attached to the operation button unit substrate 375 for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to the light from the mounted LED 375a.

  Further, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 supports the sub button lens 372 a having a substantially isosceles right-angled triangle shape in plan view and the light transmitting property, and the sub button lens 372 a on the upper surface of home base shape in plan view. A sub-button base 372 b accommodated in the sub-button accommodation recess 373 e of the operation button unit base 373 and disposed below the sub-button lens 372 a between the sub-button base 372 b and the bottom surface of the sub-button accommodation recess 373 e And a sub-button spring 372c that biases the button base 372b in a direction to raise it. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 has sub-locking claws 372d hanging downward from the back and forth across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-like guide wall 372e hanging downward from the long side of the home base shape. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall 372e.

  In the sub button 372, the sub locking claw 372d is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button accommodation recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. By locking 372 d to the locking portion, it is possible to prevent the sub button 372 from coming out of the sub button accommodation recess 373 e by the biasing force of the sub button spring 372 c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the biasing force of the sub button spring 372 c, the detection piece 372 f of the sub button base 372 b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377 An operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape having a substantially rhombic plan view shape, and the main button lens 371 a of the main button 371 and two sub buttons 372 An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372 can pass is formed, and a translucent decorative member lens 374b is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . A mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed at a diagonal corner of the long axis, and the mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373 are formed. The operation button unit 370 is attached and fixed to the plate 310 by a predetermined attachment screw. In the present example, a screw concealment 378 that hides the two attachment holes 374c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and the rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is less likely to be broken even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. Further, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or a failure occurs. , Can be easily removed and replaced from the upper side of the plate body 310. Furthermore, since the lower part of the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later via the plate body 310, impact resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 etc. The property is further enhanced, and not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire plate unit 300 is less likely to be damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 has a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speakers 121 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100; A box-like speaker box 392 is mainly provided, which holds the speaker 391 at a position on the front right side in front view and on the rear side of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 of the dish unit main body 320. The lower speaker unit 390 of this embodiment is a bass reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the opening 392a, and it is possible to emit more deep bass to the diameter of the lower speaker 391 It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a position desired for the duct opening 321f of the main body portion 321 in the plate unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 by the vibration of the lower speaker 391 is It comes in and out through the duct opening 321f. In addition, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by the drive (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 so that the flow of air (wind) from the lower speaker 391 can be applied to the player's hand, so that the player can feel and feel unprecedented. There is. By sending an acoustic signal with a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321 f, and is matched with the vibrating body 371 c of the main button 371. This makes it possible to enjoy tactile effects that are not found in conventional gaming machines.

  Further, the speaker box 392 is disposed downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction port 312 of the dish 310 on the rear surface thereof, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction port 312 A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the played game ball to the lower part of the substantially center of the speaker box 392 in the left-right direction. The ball removal path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape whose rear is opened, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball removal path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the plate unit 300 The back side is closed by a ball removal path cover 191 which closes the ball removal path opening 111 of 110. In addition, the game balls distributed in the ball releasing path 393 are discharged downward from the dish unit 300 from the ball discharge port 321g of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320.

  Further, the speaker box 392 includes a second ball slide holding hole 394 for slidably holding the front end of the second ball slide 362 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360 in the upper left side in a front view, And a second ball pulling mechanism support portion 395 disposed on the rear side of the double ball pulling slide holding hole 394 and supporting a second ball pulling mechanism support 368 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360. The second ball removing mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removing slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removing mechanism support portion 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 and the like, the handle device 400 in the pan unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower surface of the open side of the door frame 5, and a door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. The joint unit 180 is assembled with the back surface of the joint member 180 and cooperates with a rotary shaft 415 that rotates in response to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 410, and changes the rotary motion of the rotary shaft 415 into a sliding motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is mounted on the handlebar support cylinder portion of the cylindrical handle base 303 so as to project forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. It is inserted and fixed to 303a. The handle support cylindrical portion 303 a is formed so as to be inclined toward the outside (right side) in a plan view as viewed from the top of the pachinko machine 1, and hence the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylindrical portion 303 a. Also in a plan view, the door frame is inclined outward (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) to open the door frame It will be attached and fixed to 5. As described above, by inclining the operation handle portion 410 outward in plan view, the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410, and there is an advantage that the user can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation. In the present embodiment, as described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an angle, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilient force of the bat firing device 650 is A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. In addition, after the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support cylindrical portion 303a, the operation handle portion 410 is formed by connecting the handle support cylindrical portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) with a screw or the like. It can not be pulled out from the handle support cylindrical portion 303a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported between the front grip member 412, the rear grip member 413, the front grip member 412, and the rear grip member 413. An operation member 414, a linear cylindrical rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 which is fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. In the rear grip member 413, a small diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylindrical portion 303a and a large diameter portion at the front of the small diameter portion are integrally formed, and an axial through hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 penetrates It is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotary shaft 415 penetrated to the shaft through hole 418 through the bearing bush 417 penetrates the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 fixed to the front side of the rear grip member 413 and The shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center is fitted.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a protrusion for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 and a mounting hole (both not shown) are provided, and the single-shot button 421 is swingably supported. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and the touch sensor 420, the firing stop switch 422 and the one-shot button 421 are attached to the protrusions, the mounting holes and the swing pin. Then, in the state where they are attached, a wiring through cylinder having a wiring through hole 419 formed on the side of the axial through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422. It derives from the portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal board 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414, a biasing spring 425 is provided so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415, and this biasing spring 425 always always rotates the rotation operation member 414. It is made to return to the position of. Furthermore, the switch contact convex portion 427 is provided to protrude on the outside of the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414, and when the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 425, the switch contact The convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422, and when the turning operation member 414 is turned by the player, the switch contact protrusion 427 is the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 Let go away and turn it on. In addition, since the single-shot button 421 can be swung with the firing stop switch 422 ON, pressing the single-shot button 421 enables the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to be turned OFF. ing.

  Conductive plating is applied to the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414, and when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414, the touch sensor 420 detects the contact. Then, when the player turns the rotation operation member 414 so that the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects a touch, the shooting motor 695 (see FIG. 91) of the bat firing device 650 described later. ) Is rotationally driven.

  Further, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a ball shape, and is brought into contact with the cam of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later as the rotating shaft 415 rotates. The portion 182 d is pressed to slide in one direction. And in this embodiment, the inclined attachment in plan view of the operation handle portion 410 as described above is achieved by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 to the handle support cylindrical portion 303 a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110 c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182c of the slide body 182. In this case, the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5 by attaching the operation handle portion 410 in an inclined manner in plan view, but the cam engagement concave portion 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Because of the space width, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engagement recess 182c. In the storage state, as shown in FIG. 59A, the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the cam-like cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is supposed to be located in space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the above-described state, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 rotates accordingly, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), The slide body 182 is in one direction (right side direction in the case of FIG. 59) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and one outer surface of the cam 416 (the outer surface of the rotation front). Slide to That is, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 is converted to the sliding movement of the slide body 182. Therefore, in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. 59A, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 and the end side of the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 in the advancing direction The rotation results in a distance S2 larger than the distance S1. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by the distance of "S2-S1". Then, the slide movement of the slide projection 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650, as shown in FIGS. 57, 60, 61, and the biasing spring 684 of the ball striking device 650. By adjusting the tension of FIG. 91), the strength of the biasing force of the hitting ball 687 can be adjusted to obtain the resilience of the player's desired batting ball. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the striking device 650 will be described in detail after the description of the striking device 650.

  The wire drawn from the inside of the operation handle portion 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through cylinder portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c is axially supported along the lower surface of the back surface of the door frame 5. And is then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the dispensing control substrate 1186 that is collectively attached to the substrate unit 1100 attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Operation effect of dish unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 62 and 63. In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 described later flow into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 through the full ball unit 900 and the prize ball contact 343 of the back plate 340. The gaming balls having flowed in from the ball inlet 341 first flow into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side in front view are lower, and the gaming balls having flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 are along the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. It comes in contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341 of the outer peripheral wall 311 h surrounding the front outer periphery of the storage tray 311. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved shape with respect to the surface of the plate back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the gaming ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the gaming ball, which flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and is reflected to the right by the outer peripheral wall 311h, passes the fourth inclined surface 311d and enters the fifth inclined surface 311e. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side in the front view, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle of the fifth inclined surface 311e is such that the gaming ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a can be uphill. The game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper part (right end in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while going up the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is divided by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f from the front side to the rear side around the right end, and the gaming ball entering the fifth inclined surface 311e is around it The fifth inclined surface 311e is returned to the fourth inclined surface 311d side disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to substantially follow the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f surrounding the.

  The gaming ball having entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e circulates to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d. It enters from the inclined surface 311 b to the right third inclined surface 311 c and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the plate back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311 c. It has become. That is, the gaming balls having flowed into the storage plate 311 from the ball supply port 341 do not directly go from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e through the fourth inclined surface 311d, the ball is led to the third inclined surface 311c through the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. It is possible to divert the game ball which has flowed in from 341.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored by effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls stored in a state of little storage like the conventional pachinko machine may block the ball inlet 341 In the game, the game is interrupted because the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is activated to stop the payout of the game ball or the game ball launch operation on the ball launcher 650 is stopped. Can be well prevented.

  By the way, many gaming balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, and the ball inlet 341 is closed by the gaming balls stored, and the prize ball communication ball 343 of the plate back plate 340 and the prize When the gaming balls stay in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 operates to stop the payout of the gaming balls from the winning ball unit 800 or Since the player can stop the game ball firing operation on the ball launcher 650, and the game can not but be stopped when the ball launcher 650's firing operation is stopped, the player holds When the game balls stored in the plate 311 become an appropriate amount, the first ball release button 351 and the second ball release button 361 are operated to arrange the game balls from the storage plate 311 below the plate unit 300 Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In the present embodiment, when the full tank switch 916 is activated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball firing device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game balls from the inside of the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pressing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the plate unit 300. Slide to release the closing between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball releasing path 313, and allow the gaming ball of the third inclined surface 311 c to flow down to the first ball extracting path 313, It can discharge | emit from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 via the extraction | drawer path | pass 393. By operating the first ball release button 351, the gaming balls can be removed from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c at the lowest position in the storage tray 311, so that all gaming balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. It can be done. However, in the ball removal by the operation of the first ball removal button 351, since the gaming balls are aligned in a line on the third inclined surface 311c, there is a problem that it takes time for the ball removal.

  Then, when the second ball removing button 361 disposed on the front left side of the plate unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removing shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 is moved and the second in the storage plate 311 is moved. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the gaming ball on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312, and the ball unit from the ball outlet 321g via the ball outlet path 393 It is possible to discharge below 300 (see FIG. 62 (B)). The second ball outlet 312 is an opening several times larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, as shown in the figure, so that many gaming balls can be quickly discharged at one time. Therefore, the presence of the two buttons of the first ball release button 351 and the second ball release button 361 allows the player to select the length of time for which the ball is to be released. Also, when a big hit occurs during the game, a large amount of balls will be paid out to the plate unit 300, and if this is left to continue the game, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the plate unit 300 (see FIG. Although the payout operation is stopped due to the function of 111) being stopped or the bullet action is stopped and there is a big hit, there is a possibility that the hitting action of the game ball is stopped and the game can not be continued In such a case, by operating the second ball release button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed and the supply of the balls to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit is maintained. It is possible to continue.

  Further, in the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removing button 361 is operated, the second ball removing shutter 364 is held at the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removing mechanism 360, and the second ball removing port A state 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and the game balls on the first inclined surface 311 a are almost gone, the game balls flowing from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. And the second inclined surface 311b on the downstream side of the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the second ball outlet 312 while reflecting on the outer peripheral wall 311h and circulating in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311 c is consumed by the firing operation of the ball launcher 650, the second inclined surface 311 b, as long as the game ball flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage tray 311, The gaming ball is supplied to the third sloping surface 311 c via the fourth sloping surface 311 d and the fifth sloping surface 311 e, and the firing operation of the gaming ball is stopped to increase the number of gaming balls that have flowed in to the third sloping surface 311 c. Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, it is possible to always secure a certain amount of gaming balls in the storage tray 311 and continue the game even with the second ball outlet 312 open. ing. That is, even in a state in which the game balls are continuously paid out during the big hit game etc., the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of the game balls in the storage tray 311.

  In the plate unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage plate 311 of the plate 310 has a bottom surface continuous with the first inclined surface 311a, the second inclined surface 311b, and the third inclined surface 311c. While it becomes lower toward the right direction (the ball supply port 342) when viewed visually, the ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340 is a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction Therefore, a step is supposed to be formed between the bottom of the reservoir plate 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in front view. ing. The difference in level between the bottom of the storage plate 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 is almost uniform at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341 There is also a slightly higher step. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the winning ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As the difference in level is small, the potential energy (falling energy) of the gaming ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is also small, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is broken. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the storage amount of gaming balls in the storage tray 311 increases and many gaming balls are stored also on the first inclined surface 311 a, the ball entrance 341 from the ball inlet 341 The game balls flowing into the storage plate 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 from the side, and the forces in the lateral direction acted on the respective game balls pushed the game balls together. It becomes a state. In this state, when the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the gaming balls are arranged in the vicinity of the upstream of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the gaming balls are pushed against each other to reduce the fluidity of the gaming balls and clogging may occur. However, in this example, as described above, the ball inlet 341 is in the left-right direction Since it is made into the extended rectangular shape, the game ball from prize ball contact 343 can flow directly into the 2nd slope 311b through shelf part 344, and can supply a game sphere to the 3rd slope 311c. (See FIG. 62 (B)).

  In addition, since the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the gaming ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 at the right side of the center of the ball inlet 341 in the lateral direction, The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and it is suppressed that the game balls push each other in the lateral direction, and the fluidity of the game balls is It is possible to prevent the lowering, and the game balls flowing in from the top (especially the game balls in contact with the front of the back plate 340) are urged to move in the lateral direction, naturally It is possible to eliminate clogging of the ball (see FIG. 63).

  Thus, even if the amount of gaming balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases, the storage tray 300 of this example has the gaming balls paid out from the winning ball unit 800 as a shelf of the ball inlet 341 of the horizontally long. Since the game balls are made to flow to the upper side of the gaming balls stored in the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, clogging of the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 can be favorably prevented from occurring. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player by continuing the game without worrying about the game balls in the tray 311.

[1-2 D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit disassembled and shown from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the figure, the glass unit 450 has an opening larger than the game window 101, and is formed of a synthetic resin, and has an annular octagonal unit frame 451 and two front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 451. A transparent glass plate 452 and a strip-shaped glass decorative substrate 453 disposed along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a open on the rear side and into which the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b opening from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 in the approximate center in the front-rear direction, a terminal plate support 451d projecting leftward from the upper end on the left in front view, and an outer periphery closer to the center in the vertical direction It has a stop piece 451e which respectively protrudes in the left and right direction from the position, and a locking projection 451f which respectively protrudes outward in the left and right direction from both ends of the lower side.

  In addition, the glass decoration substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-shaped and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the surface side (the inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decoration substrate and fixed to the glass decoration relay terminal plate 454 supported by the terminal plate support 451 d of the unit frame 451 and the end portion of the glass decoration substrate 453 to the glass decoration relay terminal plate 454 And a terminal plate holder 456 covering the terminal plate support 451 d of the unit frame 451 supporting the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In the glass unit 450, with the glass decorative substrate 453 inserted in the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the glass plate 452 is adhesively fixed on the front and back of the unit frame 451. Then, in the glass unit 450, the engagement groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bending projection 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper 451e and The locking projection 451 f is fitted from the rear side into the glass unit support stepped portion 110 a of the door frame base main body 110, and then can be detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the locking lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can emit light and decorate between the two glass plates 452 by appropriately emitting the LED 453 a of the glass decoration substrate 453, and an atmosphere different from that of the conventional pachinko machine ( The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to have the gaming window 101 of the mood).

[1-2 E. Security cover]
Then, the crime prevention cover 470 in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.21 and FIG.22. The crime prevention cover 470 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 described above to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 4, and as shown in the drawing, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape to cover the lower part of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing sheet metals 142 and 143, and the upper side is an arc-shaped abutting recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4 And a rear projection 474 is provided to project rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, in the state where the crime prevention cover 470 is attached, a crime prevention rear end projection piece 475 is formed so as to be inclined and formed on the back surface on the shaft support side. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, the crime prevention front projection 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 with the crime prevention cover 470 attached is provided in a protruding manner. A mounting elastic piece 473 to be formed is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5 by attaching the attachment elastic piece 473 to the attachment opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the front protrusion 472 for crime prevention faces the lower back single side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. As shown in FIG. Further, the front end of the security front projection piece 472 is in contact with the vertical bending projection piece 151. In addition, although the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting backward, when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the pivotally supported side of the post-crime projecting piece 474 is Although the lower side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 is in a state of facing and facing, the half on the open side of the projecting piece 474 is the rail crime formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 It will be in the state where it is inserted in the groove 607, and the security rear end projection 475 will be in a polymeric position along the upper surface of the security projection 608 formed on the pivoting side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76) ).

  Thus, in the state where the crime prevention cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention structure by the door frame protrusion 110 d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the crime prevention protrusion 166 and crime prevention space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by and, even if it is attempted to invade an illegal tool from below the glass unit 450, the intrusion of the illegal tool from the lower front side of the crime prevention cover 470 due to the superposition of the front projection 472 and the unit frame 451. Is prevented, and the superposition of the projection 474 after the crime prevention and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 prevents the entry of the unauthorized tool from the lower side of the rear surface of the crime prevention cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of the illegal tool from the obliquely lower side of the pivoting side of the door frame 5, the overlapping structure of the security projection 608 and the security rear end projecting piece 475 prevents the intrusion of the incorrect tool into the outer rail 602. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-security protrusion 474 makes it possible to prevent the entry of unauthorized tools into the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-mentioned open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 against the intrusion of the improper tool from the diagonally lower side of the open side of the door frame 5, The concavo-convex engagement of the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-security projection piece 474 can further prevent the entry of unauthorized tools into the game area 605 of the game board 4. In addition, the vertical surface between the crime prevention protrusion 474 and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 on the back side of the crime prevention cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball, it also has a function of preventing the striking of the hitting passage against the glass plate 452 which flies or reverses the guiding passage portion.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching a component, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching a component, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before attaching a component 70 is a side view of 500, FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before the parts are attached, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame 3 with the parts attached FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the main frame 3 mounted with parts pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main frame 3 with parts mounted, FIG. And FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 portion), as viewed from the back of the main body frame 3 with parts attached. .

  In the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hit ball launch device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for paying out a prize ball, a tank rail member 740 and a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the door frame 5 to the main frame 3, a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and a main frame Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided in 3 and a power supply board 1136 are provided together and a cover 1250 covering the rear opening 580 are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the various components described above are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, upper and lower support brackets 503 and 509 (both shown in FIG. 71) for supporting the main frame 3 on the outer frame 2 at the upper and lower sides on one side of the main frame main body 500 are attached. When the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 are attached to the shaft support bracket mounting steps 501, 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The side is substantially coplanar with the upper side and the side of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower side and the side of the main frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower side and the side of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. See 73). Here, the upper shaft support 503 and the lower shaft support 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. FIG. The upper shaft support bracket 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and the upper end side thereof protrudes forward, and the shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward. A door shaft support hole 505 is drilled on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support fitting 509 has an attachment portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally protruded on the lower end side and a slightly upper portion thereof. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 to the lower support bracket 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is a part of the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 to the main body frame 3 is configured. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support projection 68 of the lower support bracket 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower shaft support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. An axial support hole 508 for inserting the projecting axial pin 147 is bored.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recessed portion 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4 An area slightly recessed below the gaming board installation concave portion 510 is a plate portion 511. Further, the front upper side and the front open side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed to have a predetermined width so as to face the back of the door frame 5, and the front upper side is The upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by the projection projecting in parallel in the lateral direction, and the side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outside on the front open side of the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed by an inner wall which is an inclined surface whose rear end is connected to the first side wall 540, and the front side support side of the left side viewed from the front is the front upper side or the front open Unlike the side part, it is not formed to have a predetermined width facing the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front side supporting side part of the main body frame main body 500 is forward compared to the front upper side part and the front open side part. The shaft support 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large amount of protrusion.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed in the front upper side is bent toward the rear on both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the upper side back of the door frame 5 The bent pieces 155 and 156 to be inserted are respectively inserted. Further, the side crime prevention groove 582 and the crime prevention recess 583 formed on the front open side are folded backward at both long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the back of the open portion of the door frame 5. The open side outer bending projection piece 153 and the open side inner bending projection piece 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Furthermore, the front end L-shaped bent protrusion piece 157 of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 is mounted on the back support side 587 of the front side support side. The parts are in contact.

  And, with the above-mentioned structure, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of inserting an illegal tool such as a piano wire from the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Especially, the open side where the illegal act is most easily performed It has a structure that can prevent cheating on the side and the upper side where cheating is likely to occur next. Of course, prevention of cheating due to the contact between the support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support L-shaped bent piece 157 works well, but in most cases the support side is Between the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 as compared with the upper side and the open side, since the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected by the support brackets 45, 66 and the pivot brackets 503, 509. It is difficult to make a gap in For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure is used. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition, the front upper side, the front open side, and the front shaft support side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 have upper, middle, lower portions of the front open side other than the above-described configuration. A door hook hole 549 is made to penetrate through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a lock device 1000 described later attached to the open side back surface of the main body frame 3 and popped forward, In addition, a disc positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed on the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front pivot side. Furthermore, on the inner front surface slightly lower position of the plate positioning projection 576 of the front shaft support side, with the door frame 5 closed, the L-shaped bending protrusion 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 Two upper and lower restriction projections 577 into which the tip is inserted are provided in a protruding manner. The action of the control protrusion 577 is as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole in which the end of the game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement unit 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed approximately at the center of the game board placement unit 512, the game board A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the fourth direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the rail mounting bosses 514 are projected from the center portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end portion on the open side with a predetermined interval, and the rail mounting bosses 514 71) is screwed in place. In addition, a rail connecting member 516 is provided in a projecting manner on the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the firing rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 It is adjacent to the connection passage 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of the line 603.

  In addition, the upper end portion of the game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) of an oval shape for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 to the side position of the rail connection member 516 (the position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely downward. That is, the game board fixture 519 is rotatably provided centering on the fixture mounting boss 517, and is rotated clockwise in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board placement unit 512 and the game board is mounted. The fixing tool 519 is pressed to the front of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. In addition, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by rotating the game board fixing tool 519 in the counterclockwise direction and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 can not be rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower side of the open side of the plate portion 511 is provided with a cuboid propelling device attachment portion 520 which is provided in a bulging shape on the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 is fixed to the mounting part 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This point will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 is formed in the front wall portion of the above-mentioned launcher attachment portion 520, in which a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that cooperates with the slide projection 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is accommodated. At the adjacent position of the handle connection window 522, a shaft hole 523 is opened in which the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the hitting ball 687 faces. Further, in the upper wall portion of the launcher attachment portion 520, a weir through opening 521 for projecting the striking rod 687 of the striking launcher 650 upward is cut out, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the weir penetrating opening 521 The cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 penetrates is formed in the front of the.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 68, a ball extraction passage 524 extending downward from the upper portion on the support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 is formed. . The ball removal and discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball removal and connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71) described later from the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 into the inside of the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 is provided to project rearward above the above-described launcher attachment portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. It is inserted to facilitate the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Further, mounting holes 527 for mounting the substrate unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate portion 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the substrate unit 1100 correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fixed with screws. In addition, a projecting device mounting boss 529 for attaching the ball hitting and projecting device 650 is projected rearward in the concave inside of the projecting device mounting portion 520, and further, in the lower end on the open side, as shown in FIG. As shown, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide protuberance piece having a tapered distal end for guiding the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 is projected toward the rear.

  In the plate portion 511, in addition to the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 70, a ball connection opening 530 which is an opening of the upstream end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 524 is formed on the upper surface of the end portion on the support side. . The downstream end of the ball connection passage 880 is connected to the ball connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball removal connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full tank mounting portion 531 for mounting the full tank unit 900 (see FIG. 71) described in detail later will be orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engaging groove 532 is formed on the front of the full unit mounting portion 531 and engages with the engaging piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full unit 900. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full unit mounting portion 531, an outlet for blocking the prize balls discharged from the outlet 921 of the full unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened. A switching device 579 is provided.

  Although this outlet opening and closing device 579 will not be described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening and closing plate is lowered by the lever abutting on the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, since the contact with the lever is lost, the opening and closing plate is raised to close the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the winning balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall from the outlet 921. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole is vertically formed at a position corresponding to the upper side of the launch portion of the launch rail 515, which is the game board placement portion 512 formed along the upper edge of the plate portion 511. A fastening link 534 for forming a fastening band 619 in the front part of the fastening hole 533 is formed. The fastening link 534 is a mechanism for preventing removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. The game board installation concave portion 510 is provided on the first side wall 540 provided on the back side from the inner side face on the pivotal support side and the above-mentioned upper side portion and the open side side face surface, and on the rear side from the first side wall 540 The main body frame 3 is constituted by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 provided on the rear side from the second side wall 541, and the fourth side wall 543 provided on the rear side from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are formed in a concave shape that is enclosed.

  Note that the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed so that the upper side and the right side (side of the pivot support side) are straightly extended rearwardly with a step when viewed from the rear side. The open side is formed in a step shape (see FIG. 75) which inclines inward as it goes from the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543. This is the rearmost end of the fourth side wall 543 when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 is formed straight backward on the left side (open side). May come in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 and may not open smoothly, so the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side It is something that can be done.

  Also, at the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the open side first side wall 540, but using the lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided on the rear end side of the first side wall 540 In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the first side wall 540 on the open side and the fourth side wall 543 are formed in the shape of inclined steps. Furthermore, also in the dimension of the step of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to abut the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. Therefore, although it is formed with a certain large step, the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  The side walls 540 to 543 described above are formed to have depth widths d1, d2, d3 and d4 respectively as shown in FIG. 69, and in the case of this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4 and in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 Rear projecting portions of various game devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the peripheral back surface of the game board 4. A rear side wall for accommodating a rear projection of the gaming apparatus provided parallel to the first side wall 540 and extending parallel to the first side wall 540 rearwardly from the first side wall 540 with a step portion contacting the rear side wall; It is what constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the amounts of backward projection of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper surface on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed to be substantially at the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thus, the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, the game Even in the case where a game apparatus in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4 is attached, the rearward projecting portion of such a game apparatus can be accommodated easily.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, the rear side wall 544 is open side on the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (pivot side) of the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 An upper rear surface wall 545 and an axially supported rear surface wall 546 as a rear surface wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The front surface of the axially supported rear surface wall 546 is flat (see FIG. 67), and a ball passage unit 770 and a prize ball unit 800, which constitute a ball discharging mechanism, are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is supposed to be Therefore, it is sufficient for the inward projecting width dimension of the axially supported rear face wall 546 to have a width for attaching the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800.

  Further, the upper rear surface wall 545 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740 to be described later is attached to the rear surface, so the lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, the width of the upper rear wall 545 to the inside is sufficient if it has the height width of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Further, the open side rear surface wall 544 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a rear surface supporting cylindrical support 575 for supporting a cover 1250 described later. Therefore, it is sufficient for the inward protrusion width dimension of the open side rear surface wall 544 to have a width dimension that forms the cover body support cylindrical portion 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open side rear surface wall 544, the upper rear surface wall 545, and the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 protruding inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4 Since the size of the space formed by 543 is secured, for example, even when a game apparatus is attached in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the game board 4, such a game apparatus The rear projecting portion can be stored easily. The inner side of the open side rear surface wall 544, the upper rear surface wall 545, and the pivotal support rear surface wall 546 is a rear surface opening 580, and the rear surface opening 580 is openably closed by a cover 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 penetrates on the flat portion on the open side. Locking holes 548 (in FIG. 68) in which three middle lower positions are opened, and locking projections 1004 of the locking device 1000 described later are engaged with the upper, middle, and lower portions of the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Also, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, but a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for screwing the attachment is at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper and middle. In addition, the attachment by the screw of the lock device 1000 is not only the upper part and the middle, but also the screw attachment portion 1003 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the lock attachment hole 547 formed in the upper vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526 And the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 on the left and right of the upper front of the first side wall 540, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and A guide arc projection 552 to be in contact is provided in a protruding manner, and a relief recess 551 communicating with a notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 described later is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed in a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the attachment collar 733 of the award ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the award ball tank 720 communicates with the relief recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the ball stored in is increased, it functions so that it does not depress and ball clogging occurs. Further, when the award ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear end wall of the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the fourth side wall 543 substantially match when viewed from the front side of the award ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4) See). The above-mentioned guide arc projection 552 lifts the main frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2, and the lower side of the main frame 3 and the decorative cover plate A clearance is formed between them and 15 to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting an unauthorized device from the clearance.

  Further, a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 is formed on the upper rear surface wall 545 described above along the opening edge of the rear surface opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall A rail locking groove 554 is formed in a bent portion 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking projections 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in these rail locking grooves 553, 554. Further, a rail hooking elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear surface wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. When the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the projecting pieces 749 and 750, the rail hooking elastic piece 555 is at the downstream upper end of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact from above.

  When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail hook elastic piece 555 is pushed backward, and then the tank rail member is released to release the locked state of the rail locking grooves 553, 554 and the locking projections 749, 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is bored on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and an earth wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 etc.) is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The relief hole 556 is drilled to release the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is formed inside the tank rail member 740. While being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wire connected to a grounding connector provided on the power supply substrate 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the pivoting side rear face wall 546, and the ball passage unit is interposed between the standing walls 560. 770 and the award ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guiding protrusion 561 is provided in a bent shape so as to extend slightly from the uppermost stream portion between the left and right standing walls 560 to a position slightly above the midstream portion. When the ball passage unit 770 described later is attached, the award ball guide projection 561 is projected backward on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 so that the projecting height thereof gradually decreases toward the downstream side. , And corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770, and guides the winning balls in a row. In addition, a passage unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball passage unit 770 with a screw and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are protruded on the left and right of the award ball guiding projection 561 and a ball cutting switch described later A switch corresponding protrusion 563 is provided to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit attachment boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion which engages with a hook-like engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engagement portion of the award ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560. , And a lock elastic claw 564 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800, and the rotation shaft 808 (FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800. A relief hole 566 is formed in which the end of the reference is received. Further, a relief motor relief opening 572 is formed below the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the winning ball unit 800 faces the relief motor relief opening 572. (See FIG. 71). The prize ball unit 800 locks the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed on the lowermost end of the back surface wall 546 on the back side, and is supported by the engagement projection 565 and the elastic claw 564 for locking on the back side. It is designed to be removably attached to the face wall 546. The detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  Further, a cover contact groove 567 into which the open end of the cover 1250 is formed is formed at the open end of the axially supported rear face wall 546, and the lower end of the cover contact groove 567 is formed. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body contact groove 567 is formed with a stop hole 568 corresponding to the stop hole 1253 (see FIGS. 74 and 139) of the cover body 1250. The rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover 1250 by fastening with a screw. Further, a U-shaped locking protrusion 570 is projected from the locking wall 569, and the locking protrusion 570 is attached to the cover 1250 with the cover 1250 closed with respect to the main frame 3. By opening the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and locking a lock such as a padlock to the locking projection 570, only the person in charge having the key of the padlock opens the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 has been demonstrated, when the door frame 5 is closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engaging grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) are formed in which the door frame projecting pieces 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 directed backward are inserted. There is. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described launcher attachment portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the pivotal support side. The door frame protrusion 110 d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 is provided so as to project rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110 e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, at the lower part of the open end, a door frame protrusion 110d having a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed. The above-described door frame protrusions 110d and 110e and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 form an outer protrusion and an engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the firing rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the firing device mounting portion 520 are formed to protrude, but the firing device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 The arrangement positions of the plate portion 511 are deviated to the open side, and further, they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. Therefore, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the area from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are disposed to the open side is the back surface of the door frame 5 and the launcher attachment portion Since 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are in close contact with each other, the incorrect material such as the piano wire which has slipped through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engaging groove 585 as described above It is extremely difficult to further slip through the space between the launcher attachment portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 to reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, the door frame 5 is closed because there is no portion projecting from the surface of the plate portion 511 in the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher attachment portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not disposed The space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire which has slipped through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 described above easily simplifies the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. Since the mounting table 160 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the door frame 5 does not allow the incorrect tool to pass upward through the space 586, the space 586 is closed with the door frame 5 closed. The crime prevention protrusion 166 which intrudes into is formed. The crime prevention projection 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the pivoting side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention projection piece 166 provided to the mounting stand 160 in a projecting manner. Then, the crime prevention projection 166 and the crime prevention space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and an engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the body frame 3.

  As described above, the main unit frame 3 has the game board 4, the hit ball launcher 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, the substrate unit A cover 1100 and a cover 1250 are attached, which will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of the game board]
The schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 89. FIG. 76 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4 80 is a magnified perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4 FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder, cut in the longitudinal direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 83 is a front component mainly constituting the game board. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 as viewed obliquely from the rear, with the game panel, the panel holder, and the like disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the main control board box fixed to the board substrate holder, as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 85 disassembled into a board substrate holder, a drawer holder, and a main control board box and viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 87 is a schematic view of a disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board viewed through the game window.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment is a transparent plate-shaped game panel 600 (corresponding to the game board of the present invention), a panel holder 630 that holds the game panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and a panel A front component 601 attached to the front of the game panel 600 via the holder 630 so as to surround the game area 605, and a function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 etc.) fixed to the rear side of the front component 601; It consists of On the surface of the game panel 600, various game devices and a large number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, the front component 601 is attached to the front of the panel holder 630 after the game apparatus and the obstacle nail are provided, but the front component 601 has a circular hollow inside so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 605 And the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and the arc surface from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side passing the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602, the outer rail An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of the end portion 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow preventing member 604 of the stopper 620 on the upper side is provided. The outer rail 602 is obliquely formed with a connecting passage portion 609 which is connected to a rail connecting member 516 which is provided at the beginning end portion of the firing rail 515 as an extension of the firing rail 515 and adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 610 is formed. A metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the far port 610 to the stopper 620.

  In addition, when the hitting ball which vigorously slides the outer rail 602 collides, the stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so as to repel the hitting ball to the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the batted ball that has been fired at one end and taken into the game area 605 from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a crime prevention projection 608 is provided on one side of the lower part of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The crime prevention projection 608 overlaps in the vertical direction with the crime prevention rear end projection 475 projected on the crime prevention cover 470 as described above in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, and the shaft of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 It is intended to prevent the entry of unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the support side.

  In the middle of the lower part of the inner rail 603, an out port 606 is provided, and between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow preventing member 604, the shot hit is up to the game area 605 A hitting ball which constitutes an induced guiding path but is returned to the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the far port 610 and guided to the far ball entrance 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. The tray unit 300 is again discharged into the tray unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. Further, a rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the blocking portion 620. The rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the crime prevention protrusion 474 which is provided on the crime prevention cover 470 as described above in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed enters. Improper engagement of the piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the open side of the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlapping in the vertical direction due to the concavo-convex engagement of the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the crime prevention post 474 Finally, it prevents the entry of tools.

  By the way, on one side of the game board 4, a positioning recess 611 fitted to the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed, and on the other side of the game board 4, the board formed on the main body frame 3 A game board stopper 614 inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The game board stopper 614 is configured such that the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. In order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the positioning recess 611 is inserted obliquely from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning projection 576. The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and its end is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed . Thereafter, the game board fixture 519 is rotated to fix the lower front of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main unit frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, it may be removed in the reverse procedure of the above procedure.

  Moreover, the game board 4 in this embodiment has a structure which prevents the unauthorized removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 very easily. That is, as shown in FIG. 76 and FIG. 80, at the lower end opposite to the passage notch portion 613 below the game board 4, an attachment notch 616 penetrating the front and back of the game board 4 is formed A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component member 601.) A fastening bar 617 is horizontally fixed in the lower part of the mounting notch 616 in a horizontal direction. In the fastening bar 617, a band groove-like fastening portion 618 is formed substantially at the center of the fastening bar 617. On the other hand, as the detachment preventing mechanism provided on the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board placing portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3. A fastening hole 534 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper side of the part, and a fastening link 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 is extended (FIG. reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recessed portion 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board mounting portion 512 as shown in FIG. While being in the state, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening link 534 are in the same state. Then, with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening rod 534 are in agreement, the tip of the fastening band 619 generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch portion 616 And lead downward into the fastening hole 533 and lead it forward so that its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. Then, an unnecessary tip portion protruding forward from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut off. In this way, as long as the fastening band 619 is not cut, the game board 4 can not be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the fixing of the game board fastener 614 and the game board fixture 519 etc. is released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using the fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, the game It can be easily understood that the panel 4 has been removed and any fraud has been performed. Such an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism can prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main frame 3.

  In addition, the outer shape of the game board 4 is formed with notches 612 on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guiding passage 920 of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the far port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right of the front component 601, there is provided a sticker sheet sticking section 615 for sticking a certificate sheet for proof confirmation. Further, on the upper side of the lower right sticker sheet sticking portion 615 of the front component 601, a function indication seal 649 is stuck.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, balls downstream of winning balls for various game devices (for example, general winning openings 2101, 2101, starting openings 2001, 2002, special winning opening 2003, etc.) provided in the game area 605 A liquid crystal control substrate 3181 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151 etc.) as a display device disposed substantially at the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 A peripheral substrate box 622 in which the peripheral control substrate 4140 is housed is attached.

  Further, on the back surface of the game board 4, a board substrate holder 623 for board is fixed below the back box 621. The board substrate holder 623 has a space (a width in the front-rear direction is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so that the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 are collected in front of the board substrate holder 623. Is formed, and a drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom of the space. The drop port 629 merges at a rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in a substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 also has a main control board box 624 containing a main control board 4100 for controlling the game operation on its back side, a payout control board 1186 and a power board 1136 provided on the board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal board 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 which are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the substrate unit 1100 simply by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3.

  Further, the board substrate holder 623 for a panel is formed with a bonding guide protrusion 628 which protrudes rearward from the space between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The bonding guide projections 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the substrate unit 1100 side and the game board 4 side when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 as described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the bonding guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be connected naturally (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component, game panel, panel holder, panel back plate]
Subsequently, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82 to 84. The game board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a plate-shaped game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin for holding the game panel 600 detachably from the front. And an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 630 to partition and form the outer periphery of the game area 605 and to guide the game balls into the game area 605. A front component 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 are mainly provided.

  As shown, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601 a and positioning projections 601 b that project rearward on the rear surface side. The positioning bosses 601a and the positioning projections 601b can be positioned with the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 which are disposed on the rear side, which will be described in detail later.

  The outer shape of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 is a polygonal shape slightly larger than the game area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, etc. . The thickness of the game panel 600 is thinner than that of the panel holder 630, and is set to a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently held even if a fault nail (not shown) is planted.

  In this game panel 600, there are a plurality of fitting holes 600a arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating in the front-rear direction Each one is provided. The fitting holes 600 a and the long holes 600 b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engagement steps 600c which are recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 600c is formed by cutting out approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 600, and is disposed outside the game area 605, similarly to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b, It is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

  Further, the gaming panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 603 to the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Furthermore, in the game panel 600, a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed so that the center character 2300, the attacker unit 2000, etc. are provided (see FIGS. 159 and 160). In addition to the above, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. These openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game panel 600, and since the outer periphery of the game panel 600 is connected, the strength of the game panel 600 is obtained by the openings 600e. To prevent the

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size including the game panel 600 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and the thickness of a member (for example, game board base etc.) made of wooden plywood in the game board of the conventional pachinko machine It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (about 20 mm in this example). In the panel holder 630, a holding stepped portion 630a detachably holding the game panel 600 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the back and forth in approximately the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding stepped portion 630a. It mainly includes a through hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 600, and the front surface of the game panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It becomes almost the same plane as. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 630a has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the gaming panel 600. By this clearance C, even if the game panel 600 is relatively expanded or contracted due to a temperature change or a temporal change, the expansion or contraction can be absorbed. The clearance C may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, from the front of the holding step portion 630a toward the front. It has a plurality of projecting pins 630c which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b of the game panel 600. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 630 c into the fitting holes 600 a and the long holes 600 b of the game panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the game panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engagement claw 630d and an engagement piece 630e which are engaged with the engagement step 600c at a position corresponding to the engagement step 600c of the game panel 600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claws 630d are disposed on the upper holding steps 630a of the panel holder 630 and correspond to the upper engaging steps 600c in the game panel 600. It projects forward from the front surface of the holding step 630 a and is resiliently engaged with the engagement step 600 c. The engagement claw 630 d is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engaging piece 630e is disposed on the lower holding step 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engaging step 600c in the game panel 600, and is played between the front of the holding step 630a. In a state where a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted is formed, the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 is configured to extend along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) by a predetermined amount. The game panel 600 is detachably held on the panel holder 630 by engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement piece 630e.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a boss insertion hole 630f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided on the front component member 601 can be inserted. In this boss insertion hole 630f, the positioning boss of the front component member 601 The panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other by inserting 601 a.

  In the panel holder 630, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 84, a mounting support portion 630g having a form in which a predetermined amount is recessed in the front side so as to leave the lower side slightly lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction Is equipped. With this mounting support portion 630g, the rear surface of the panel holder 630 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end above the predetermined range from the lower end to the rear peripheral side protruding backward, and the amount of depression ( Depth) is about 2.5 mm (in this example) which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 630g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 can be pachinko machine 1 It can be installed and installed reliably in the game board installation recess 510 of

  Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630, it is formed lower than the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635 An accommodation recess 630h is further provided, and an engagement portion 630i which is disposed so as to penetrate in the accommodation recess 630h in the front-rear direction and can engage an engagement claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h releasably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by locking the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 635 is a panel It is formed to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 630.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j which are disposed in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. It is arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 630j (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed so that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 630j. 630 j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 630l that open to the rear side in at least a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the lightening portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these lightening portions 630l are not formed in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within the range In the above, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component 601 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface. The launched game balls are smoothly guided. In addition, as illustrated, the panel holder 630 is formed with a lightening portion 630 l so that the mounting holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 630 is maintained. The grid-like ribs are formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 630 is provided with a positioning portion 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and the game panel 600 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 630, an opening 630n communicating with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o communicating with the far port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the lightening portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height, and the rear surface of the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630 A plurality of screw holes 635a which can be accommodated so as to be substantially flush with each other and which are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the planar rear surface and which can screw predetermined screws can be arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight loss recess 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw holes 635a and the positioning holes 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting holes 630j and the positioning holes 630k in the panel holder 630. Further, in the panel back plate 635 as well as the panel holder 630, the portion where the screw holes 635a and the positioning holes 635b and the like are formed is formed into a boss shape by the recessed portion 635d and supports them or the panel back plate In order to maintain the strength of 635, grid-like ribs are formed. Furthermore, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

  The panel back plate 635 is integrated with the panel holder 630 by being accommodated in the accommodation recess 630 h of the panel holder 630 and by locking the locking claw 635 c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630 i of the panel holder 630. In that state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this manner, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged in a predetermined array on the entire outer periphery of the through hole 630b on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630. Mounting holes such as 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are disposed, and by the presence of these mounting holes, a predetermined member can be mounted and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the present example, the game panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630 a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claw 630 d and the engaging piece 630 e By engaging the engagement step 600c, the game panel 600 can be held by the panel holder 630, and the front side of the game panel 600 and the front surface of the panel holder 630 become substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set in the conventional obstacle nail planting device in the state where the game panel 600 is held in the panel holder 630 without remodeling the obstacle nail planting device used more It is possible to suppress such cost increase.

  Further, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component 601, the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. varies depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing game panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 can be used as a common part, and the panel holder 630, the front component 601, etc. can be made recyclable. The pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 4 capable of supporting various types of machines can be realized only by exchanging only one.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of mounting holes 630j are provided in advance in the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement, various types of back unit 2000, board substrate holder 623 for a panel, etc., which are attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630 The panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 630j even if the mounting and fixing positions of predetermined members are different. It can be made into parts.

  In the present embodiment, in the game board 4, the transparent game panel 600 forming the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630, but like the conventional pachinko machine, the game panel While making 600 integral with the panel holder 630, you may make it form with wooden plywood, such as a veneer board.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and FIG. The board substrate holder 623 for a panel is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and as shown in the figure, it is in the form of a box whose front and upper sides are open. And the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600 can be discharged from substantially the center in the left-right direction downward. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting a main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 623 for the panel, and on the side (right side in rear view) of the main control board box mounting portion 623a. A sealed portion 623 b corresponding to the sealing portion 624 a provided in the main control substrate box 624 is formed. In addition, a drawer holder 636 for supporting the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623 for panel.

  The main control board box 624 in this example is supported by the main control board box attachment portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box attachment portion 623a. It seals to the side sealed part 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board holder 623 for panel in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box attachment portion 623a. It is possible to visually determine whether or not it has been removed illegally.

[1-3A-3. Function Display Unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, this function display board 640a includes segment displays SEG1 and SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. The first special symbol display 641 is assigned to the segment display SEG1, and the second special to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures etc as a special symbol, the first start of the attacker unit 2000 described later When the game ball wins in the mouth 2001, the segment display SEG1 fluctuates and displays a predetermined special symbol, and when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 2002, the segment display SEG2 fluctuates and displays a predetermined special symbol. It has become.

  In addition, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is assigned to LED1, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is assigned to LED2, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is for LED3, and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is for LED4. Each is assigned. The first special symbol storage indicator 643 lights up or blinks with the number of balls of the winning game ball as the hold number when the gaming ball which has won the first starting hole 2001 is not used in the variable display of the special symbol There is. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a lights up and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the first special symbol memory The indicator 643 lights together, and the first special symbol memory lamp 643a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b lights when the holding ball is three balls, and the first special symbol memory display when the holding ball is four balls The devices 643 both blink. On the other hand, when the game ball which has won the second starting opening 2002 is not used in the variation display of the special symbol, the second special symbol memory display 644 is lit or blinked with the number of balls of the game ball which wins as the hold number. It has become. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the second special symbol memory is The indicator 644 lights together, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a blinks when the holding ball is 3 balls, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b lights, and the second special symbol memory display when the holding balls are 4 balls Both the lamps 644 blink.

  Furthermore, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED that can turn on red / green / orange, and can also be turned on in combination of these red / green / orange. When the game ball passes through a gate 2201 of a gate member 2200 described later, the LED 5 is designed to display a variable pattern of a predetermined normal symbol by displaying the color to be lit as a normal symbol.

  Also, a symbol storage indicator 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9 respectively. When the game ball which has passed the gate 2201 is not used in the variable display of the normal symbol (when performing the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 645 and when opening and closing the movable piece 2005, the gate The normal symbol storage indicator 646 lights up with the number of balls of the passing game ball as the hold number for the game ball not immediately used for the variable display of the normal symbol immediately after passing 2201. Specifically, when the holding ball is one ball, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. Normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are extinguished, and when the holding balls are three balls, normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are lit and normal symbol memory lamps 646b are extinguished, and when the holding balls are four spheres, normal symbol memory display All 646 lights up.

  Also, a game state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED that can turn on red / green / orange, and can also be turned on in combination of these red / green / orange. The LED 10 is configured to notify that the game state is in probability fluctuation or a small hit by displaying the lighted color as the game state.

  Furthermore, a 2-round indicator lamp 648 a is assigned to the LED 11 and a 15-round indicator lamp 648 b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the two-round display lamp 648a lights up to notify that the number of times the big winning opening 2003 is opened from the closed state (round) is two times, while displaying the fifteenth round The lamp 648b lights to notify that the round is 15 times.

  Thus, the segment displays SEG1 and SEG2, and the LEDs 1 to 12 mounted on the function display substrate 640a are the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, A second special symbol memory indicator 644, an ordinary symbol indicator 645, an ordinary symbol memory indicator 646, a game state indicator 647, and a round indicator 648 are respectively assigned to display various functions, segment indicator SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, the second special symbol memory indicator 644, the ordinary symbol indicator 645, the ordinary symbol memory The display 646, the game state display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol memory display 644, in order to variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, respectively, Alphanumeric characters and figures are displayed using the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the normal symbol indicator 645, the ordinary symbol memory indicator 646, the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648, and different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned thereto Etc. are displayed as a special symbol.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol storage indicator 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and LEDs 12 assigned to the round indicator 648 is a fixed value 6.

  The function display substrate 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with a screw (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back of the front component 601 of the game board 4 with a screw (not shown). In the front component member 601, segment display openings 601c are formed at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display substrate 640a, and the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 87, in the front component member 601, the LED insertion holes 601d are provided at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display substrate 640a, and the cover member 640b is a front component member 601. The LED 1 to the LED 12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when mounted on the back surface of the disc. The LED insertion holes 601 d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that lights lit or blinked of the LEDs 1 to 12 are not mistaken as lights lit or blinked of the adjacent LEDs. The contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by lighting or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display sticker attaching part 601 e for attaching the function display sticker 649. In addition, the recessed part 601f is formed in the function display seal sticking part 601e. A tool such as a minus driver is inserted into the recess 601f to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649 pasted. Here, it is conceivable to provide a projection on the function display seal 649 in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, but when opening and closing the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3, the projection is pulled for some reason As a result, the function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker sticking part 601e. So, in this embodiment, when opening and closing the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 by forming the recessed part 601f in the function display seal sticking part 601e, the function display seal 649 is prevented from peeling off from the function display seal sticking part 601e. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function Display Sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display stickers 649 in the gaming machine 4 are printed by grouping them into groups Grp1 to Grp3 every function display on the surface thereof, and in the non-play area of the game board 4 It is stuck on a function indication seal sticking section 601e formed on a certain front component member 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 is composed of a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol memory display 643, and these first special symbol display 641 and first special symbol memory display It is divided in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1 which can visually recognize 643 and is printed on the function display seal 649. The first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory so that the area surrounded by the solid line SL1 can be visually recognized as the display by the first special symbol display 641 or the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various types of information on the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 are displayed. For example, when the first start opening 2001 is start-up winning, the first special symbol display 641 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, or the first special symbol memory display 643 takes the number of balls of the winning game ball as the hold number. It lights up or blinks. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory display 643 can be obtained. It is possible to convey to the player that various pieces of information relating to the variable display of the special symbol by the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 2001 are shown. Thereby, the player changes the special symbol by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 by visually observing the group Grp1 which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1 and printed on the function display sticker 649. Various information on the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 is composed of a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol memory indicator 644. These second special symbol indicator 642 and second special symbol memory It is divided in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2 which makes the display 644 visible and is printed on the function display seal 649. The second special symbol display 642, second special symbol memory so that the area surrounded by the solid line SL2 can be visually recognized as display by the second special symbol display 642 or lighting or blinking by the second special symbol memory display 644. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information regarding the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 are displayed. For example, when the game ball wins the start to the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, or the second special symbol memory display with the number of balls of the winning game ball as the hold number The lamp 644 lights up or blinks. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol memory indicator 644 into one group Grp2, these second special symbol indicator 642 and the second special symbol memory indicator 644 It is possible to convey to the player that various pieces of information regarding the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 are shown. Thereby, the player changes the display of the special symbol by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 by visually observing the group Grp2 which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649. It is possible to easily confirm various information on

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 is composed of an ordinary symbol display 645 and an ordinary symbol storage indicator 646, and a solid line SL3 for visualizing the ordinary symbol indicator 645 and the ordinary symbol storage indicator 646. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. The area surrounded by the solid line SL3 has a transparent position corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage indicator 646 so that lighting by the normal symbol indicator 645 and lighting by the normal symbol storage indicator 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 variably displays the presence or absence of opening and closing of the movable piece 2005 as a predetermined normal symbol, and when the movable piece 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the gaming ball moves to the second starting opening 2002 It becomes easy to win a prize. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes the first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol memory display 644, and the ordinary symbol memory display Stars are printed to distinguish them from the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648. In this group Grp3, various information on the gate 2201 can also be displayed. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display 645 variably displays a predetermined normal symbol, or the normal symbol storage display 646 lights up with the number of balls of the game ball passed as the hold number. In this manner, by grouping the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage indicator 646 into one group Grp3, various types of the normal symbol indicator 645 and the ordinary symbol storage indicator 646 related to the variation display of the normal symbol are displayed. The player can be informed that information is being shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information related to the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 88, in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 in which the gaming state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized at positions corresponding to the gaming state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648, respectively. It is divided and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that lighting by the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. In order to make it easy to understand the maximum number of rounds on the round indicator 648, the value 2 which is the maximum number of rounds is printed at the position corresponding to the 2 round display lamp 648a, and the position corresponding to the 15 round display lamp 648b The value 15 is printed, which is the maximum number of rounds. As described above, the gaming state indicator 647 indicates that the gaming state is a probability fluctuation or a small hit by displaying the color to be lit as the gaming state, and the two-round display lamp 648a has the special winning opening 2003. The indication that the number of times (round) from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 is turned on and notified, and the 15-round display lamp 648b is turned on and informed that the round is 15 times. As a result, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state indicator 647 which is partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL4 and printed on the function display sticker 649, as indicated by the solid line SL5. It can be easily confirmed whether the maximum number of rounds is 2 times or not by visually observing the 2-round indication lamp 648a which is partitioned in the enclosed state and printed on the function indication sticker 649. By visually observing the fifteen-round indicator lamp 648b which is partitioned in the enclosed state and printed on the function indicator sticker 649, it can be easily confirmed whether the maximum number of rounds is fifteen or not.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are partitioned in a state surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649, and the gaming state indicator 647, the round indicator The position corresponding to 648 is divided and printed in a state of being surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 which the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can visually recognize.

  Thus, in the function display seal 649, the functions of the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display substrate 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as in the groups Grp1 to Grp3, etc. The content is printed and partitioned. In addition, even if a star is printed on the normal symbol display 645, etc. and the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2 and LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are It is easy to understand.

  The correspondence between the function and the printed content is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a seal management number 649a, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the seal management number 649a is printed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize from the game window 101 via the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey information that is not necessary to the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the recessed portion 601f provided in the function display sticker attaching portion 601e is also formed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is for preventing an operation error in which a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 erroneously attaches a different function display seal when assembling the pachinko machine 1. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and the modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are linked to the seal management number 649a and managed. Thus, when the seal management number 649a is checked, the stock of the function display stickers 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, recent pachinko machines have been shortened in their development period as their life cycles have been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for notifying that the number of times that the special winning opening 2003 changes from the closed state to the open state is 15 times. In addition to the above, when adding a 5-round indicator lamp or an 8-round indicator lamp to notify that the number of rounds is 5 times and 8 times, the number of starting openings may be reduced from 2 to 1 etc. The specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be coped with by using the common function display substrate 640a. In order to change the contents to be printed on the function display sticker with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the functions of the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and LED1 to LED12 described above and the contents printed on the function display seal The correspondence relationship of is printed on the function indication seal as a seal management number. Thus, for example, at the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, before the worker of the line affixes the function display seal 649 to the game board 4, whether the specification of the pachinko machine 1 corresponds to the function display seal 649 or not It can confirm by visually observing seal management number 649a, and it can prevent that the function display seal 649 which does not correspond to the specification of the pachinko machine 1 is stuck. The function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to the improvement of productivity.

[1-3 B. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, a striking launch device 650 (corresponding to the launch device of the present invention) will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. 90 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hitting and launching apparatus 650 and a perspective view (B) of a state in which the firing motor portion is removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting and launching apparatus 650. FIG. 93 is a front view (A) showing the relationship between the ball hitting and launching device 650 and the firing rail 515, and a perspective view (B) of the firing motor portion. FIG. 93 is a ball hitting and firing in the state where the operation handle portion 410 is not operated. FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the launch rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking launcher 650 and the launch rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and an AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the hitting and firing apparatus 650 It is.

  The hitting and launching apparatus 650 pivotally supports the hitting bowl 687 rotatably on the firing base frame 651, and mounts on the firing base frame 651 a firing motor 695 for giving a reciprocating rotation to the hitting bowl 687. The projection base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 for adjusting the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 for applying a biasing force to return to the above.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the firing base frame 651 is formed of a synthetic resin into a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 is fitted substantially at the center thereof A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed on the upper side and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball 687 when the hitting ball 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. Also, a slide guide hole 655 in the form of a long narrow groove is formed above the rear of the firing base frame 651 (opposite the part corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and the slide member storage space is below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is for guiding a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding on the rear end upper portion of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is a guide bush 681 fixed to a lock hole 662 formed on the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682 in a guide long hole 680 formed on the front of the slide rod 677 By penetrating the Further, as shown in FIG. 92, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

  In the front part of the upper side of the firing base frame 651, a flange is formed with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operation piece opening 657 is formed in the flange above the bearing cylinder 652. There is. The weight 173 of the ball feed member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the striking ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 in the operation piece opening 657. The actuating piece 658 which abuts on the mounting portion 660 which is provided on the rear upper part of the opening edge of the actuating piece opening 657 is pivotably provided by a locking pin 659. The actuating piece 658 is formed in a "字" shape, and the base plate of the rear end of the upper side is pivotally supported by the stop pin 659, and pivots integrally with the hitting ball 687 in the arc portion below from the pivot The upper side portion swings the ball feed member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocation of the hitting ball 687 while in contact with the actuating piece contact portion 693 protruding from the 690, and the swinging motion of the ball feed member 172 strikes the ball supply port. The hitting balls flowing out of 171 b are supplied one by one to the launching position of the launching rail 515.

  Furthermore, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 incorporating the firing motor 695 to the firing base frame 651 are projected at a total of three locations, two at the lower rear and one at the upper front. And a boss 663 for a rocking piece into which the shaft hole 673 of the lower end of the rocking piece 672 connected with the slide member 710 is slid to slide the slide rod 677 rearward of the lower portion of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the metal plate 665 is in close contact with the shot base launcher 650 in order to increase the rigidity thereof. Therefore, through holes 666, 667, 668, 669, corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the rocking piece boss 663 in the metal plate 665. 671 is formed, and a laterally elongated elliptical through hole 670 through which the connection convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also penetrated. After the metal plate 665 configured as described above stores the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656, the through holes 666 to 671 correspond to the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by closely fitting and screwing the firing base frame 651 in a penetrating or matching manner.

  The tip end portion of the rocking piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached has a head extending from the through hole 671. The shaft hole 673 of the rocking piece 672 is inserted through the head portion. The swinging piece 672 is swingably supported around the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in the shape of a vertically long wedge, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the slightly long hole shape in which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle Connection holes 674 are formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 which abuts on one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Then, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663, and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with a washer The swinging piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The mounted swinging piece 672 is configured such that the upper portion thereof swings around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Also, on the upper front surface of the metal plate 665, a horizontally elongated slide rod 677 is slidably mounted in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 protruding from the rear upper portion of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665 and the guide long hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is penetrated to fix the set screw 682 in the set hole 662. The slide rod 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is provided at one end (rear end) thereof with an abutted portion 679 which abuts on the abutment portion 675 of the swinging piece 672 described above, and the other end (front end) is one end of the biasing spring 684 A spring locking portion 683 is provided in a protruding manner for locking the locking wheel 685.

  Although the bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 is fitted to the bearing cylinder 652 so as not to come off. The lower end portion of the ball striking rod 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and at the same time the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with a working piece abutting portion 693 which abuts on the working piece 658 on the front and back side, and a spring for holding the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on its front side. A locking portion 692 is provided in a protruding manner, and a motor contact protrusion 691 which is engaged with and disengaged from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided in a protruding manner on the front side in the rear. At the upper end of the striking ball stick 687, a synthetic resin bite 688 is fixed, and the firing position is formed by the lower end of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 fixed above it. I am about to rush into

  On the other hand, on the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651, the shooting motor 695 housed in the motor cover 694 is attached. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 has a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 inside, and the motor mounting boss 661 enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion. And a mounting portion in which a mounting fixing hole 699 for mounting is formed integrally with the reverse rotation preventing cam 698 and the motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 formed integrally inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation preventing cam 698, and it engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) which is pivotably fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 to be a firing motor The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent a failure that the motor cam 697 rotates in the reverse direction and the motor cam 697 and the motor contact protrusion 691 mesh with each other and the ball striking device 650 can not be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball-like shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball 687 while engaging and disengaging with the motor contact protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the main structure of the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 which is stored in the slide member storage space 656 and slides as described above is formed in a rectangular shape whose rear is open, and an elliptical convex portion 711 having an oval shape is protruded on the front surface thereof. In addition, a circular connection protrusion 712 is provided at the rear of the elliptical protrusion 711. Further, on the upper surface and the lower surface, slide contact projections 713 having a circular arc shape in cross section are provided so as to project at both ends so as to slide in the slide member storage space 656 easily. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided on the lower surface of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the near side of the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction, and protrudes slightly inward from the upper surface and the lower surface of the first inclined surface 715 A sandwiching piece 716 is formed, which has a predetermined distance between its tips. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 to be inclined in a V-shape in a side view toward the back. Thus, in the state where the slide projection 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end side of the slide projection 183 on the inclined side 183a abuts the side wall in the slide direction front. In the state, it is in a state of being inserted between the upper and lower holding pieces 716. Although the space 718 is formed on the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, the space 718 does not particularly function.

  In the state where slide member 710 configured as described above is stored in slide member storage space 656, as shown in FIG. 92A, an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of slide member storage space 656. While the insertion space 714 is formed to face the connection opening 664 of a shape, the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. It is illustrated as being in contact, but in the normal state it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship between the strength of the slide member 710 and the biasing spring 684 of the hitting and firing apparatus 650 will be described. The slide member 710 is at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 92A). When in the position abutted against the inner wall of the space), as shown in FIG. 93, the swinging piece 672 connected to the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. Therefore, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swinging piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left direction in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swinging piece 672 The abutted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 abuts. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball 687 is weak even if the hitting ball 687 is reciprocated by the rotation of the firing motor 695, and the hitting ball in the firing position Even if it is emitted, it does not reach the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves in the direction of the left space inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swinging piece 672 swings and tilts about the lower shaft hole 673, the contact between the contact portion 675 and the abutted portion 679 causes the slide rod 677 to move in the other direction (rightward in FIG. 94). Slide towards. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball 687 becomes stronger when the hitting ball 687 is reciprocated and rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, and the hitting ball in the firing position is It is strongly bombarded to reach the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the resilience of the ball can be adjusted according to the amount of sliding of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the elastic force by the hitting and firing device 650, but the movement of the slide member 710 is determined by the rotation of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 described above. It is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 which moves in response to the turning operation of the movement operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, by rotating the pivoting operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, the cam 416 in the form of a fixed ball fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 also rotates. 182 slides in the interior of the joint unit mounting recess 110c in one direction. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 provided on the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. In a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the discharge device attachment portion 520 of the main body frame 5 to insert the slide member 710. It is to be inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side of the inclined side 183 a of the slide protrusion 183 is in contact with the side wall in the slide direction front and is inserted between the upper and lower sandwiching pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide projection 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides along with the slide movement of the slide member 710, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hitting ball of the hitting and firing device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the ball striking and firing device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the hit and fired device 650 cooperate with or separate from each other. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710 and the handle device 400 The slide projection 183 separates from the insertion space 714 and separates the handle device 400 and the hitting and firing device 650 by opening the door frame 5 to the body frame 3 in cooperation with the hitting and firing device 650. As the door frame 5 is opened and closed, cooperation and separation between the handle unit 400 and the ball striking and firing unit 650 can be performed extremely easily. In particular, when the slide projection 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projection 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 provided in the insertion space 714 is provided. The surface 717 allows the slide projection 183 to be smoothly inserted into the nipping position.

  Also, sometimes the player stuffs a stuffing into the pivoting operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fixes it at a position where it is pivoted to a certain extent, but the clerk of the game arcade does not know the stuff and the door frame May open and close 5 Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem since the slide projection 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projection 183 The slide member is accompanied by the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the slide protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the slide member Finally, the slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are engaged while moving the 710 in one direction. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 is fixed at any rotation position, cooperation between the operation handle device 400 and the ball striking and launching device 650 can be performed. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B) and a side view (C) of the award ball tank 720. FIG. As described above, the award ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the award ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the notch portion 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom thereof is the downstream side wall 723 from the upstream side wall 724. The reservoir portion 728 is formed of a first sloped bottom surface 726 sloped toward the and a second sloped bottom surface 727 sloped from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described next.

  Further, a discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the slope of the second sloped bottom surface 727, and the discharge port 730 protrudes outside the rear wall 722 of the award ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It is formed to be surrounded by the outlet projecting wall 725 connecting the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 in a U-shape. In addition, mounting flanges 733 engaged with the tank mounting grooves 550 are formed on both ends outside of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, and the bottom of the prize ball tank 720 has the bottom face of the main body frame 3. Mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 protruding from the four side wall 543 are provided in a protruding manner, and a ball aligning member 744 described later is attached to the lower part of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the winning ball tank 720 A leveling mounting shaft 735 is provided in a protruding manner. Further, an overflow prevention member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the award ball tank 720 except the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting collar 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are mounted on the main body frame 3. The fourth side wall 543 is abutted. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is mounted on and attached to the upper surface of the back surface of the main body frame 3. In this mounted state, as shown in FIG. 74, storage is performed via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described next. ing. Therefore, in the award ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) storing balls is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. While being formed to be substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction to the fourth side wall 543, the fourth side wall 543 is placed on the upper side of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, as described above, since the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are formed deep so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral portion of the game board 4, the side wall 541 to Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper portion of the 543 is formed shallower than that of the conventional reservoir tank, the prize ball tank 720 is formed even if the prize balls are stored and the weight increases. Since the whole is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the balls stored can be smoothly led to the discharge port 730 without any deformation of the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727. In addition, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the award ball tank 720, the flow of the balls stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. Is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which the opening is provided in a part of the inclined bottom as in the prior art and used as the discharge port, the ball breaking protrusion for elimination of the ball clogging is formed in the reservoir near the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging to occur.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 accommodating the rear projection of the gaming apparatus, and the prize Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 is provided so as to project outward beyond the rear wall 722 of the storage section, the tank rail member 740 is located outside the storage section of the prize ball tank 720 (when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 Side, and the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, so the rear projection of the gaming apparatus provided on the back of the game board 4 is accommodated. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected backward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, whereby the rear projection of the gaming apparatus is projected at the upper side of the game board 4 It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 accommodating the rear projection of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is of the prize ball tank 720. The configuration provided outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that the conventional prize ball tank does not have. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the balls at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the drawing, at normal times, the balls stored in the winning ball tank 720 are stored in the storage portion of the winning ball tank 720 and are in a stagnant state. In this case, when a part of the inclined bottom of the storage portion is opened to form the discharge port 730A as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. When the discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball breaking protrusion 736B, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge ball 730A is formed with the discharge port 730A formed on the opposite side. In the portion 730B, the pressure of the stored ball and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure always cause the ball pressure to be applied to the discharge port 730A, 730B from four directions.

  For this reason, even if the pressure of the balls is balanced depending on the degree of polymerization of the balls, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, the ball biting state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B and ball clogging may occur. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere at the outlet 730 is a pressure from two directions, ie, an acting force from the reservoir toward the outlet 730 and its reaction, and it does not receive pressure from all directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult for the ball biting state in the discharge port 730 to occur, and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that no ball clogging occurs.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Subsequently, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the above-described award ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 100 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship between a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail member 740, a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, and a full tank unit 900. FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball | bowl passage unit 770. FIG.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear surface wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, on the tank rail member 740, a plurality of locking projections 749 to be inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 are protruded at the left and right sides and the lower side of the side surface on the rear surface side. At the center, a hook-shaped locking projection 750 which is latched from above on the rail locking groove 554 is provided in a protruding manner. Then, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape whose upper surface is open, the upstream end upper surface of which faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the downstream end lower surface thereof is in the ball passage unit 770 described later in detail. I am facing. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 is a passage 742 through which the balls flow in two rows by dividing walls 741.

  A fine groove is cut off at the bottom of the passage 742 so that foreign matter rolling along the passage 742 with the ball drops downward from the fine groove. Also, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742 and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68) described above. ing. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the ball flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate via the grounding wire connector 557 and the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 1136 to the outside.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight is provided swingably on the slightly downstream side of the middle region of the tank rail member 740. The ball straightening member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball straightening attachment shaft 735 of the above-mentioned winning ball tank 720, and is directed toward the inside of the two rows of passages 742 in the tank rail member 740. The balls are suspended, and the balls flowing down the respective passages 742 rectify so as to become one stage when flowing down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 downstream of the installation position of the ball straightening member 744 is covered by a ball holding plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in a slanted arc shape so that the ball which has not been made into one step by the ball aligning member 744 is forcibly made into one step.

  Further, at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740, a pair of aligning gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 facing the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 such that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by half a pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the ball which has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 is brought downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the balls of the two rows of the passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the balls having flowed through the respective passages 742 are guided centrally along the inclined surface 743 formed at the lower part of the two rows of the passages 742 while meshing with the aligning gear 747 During guidance, balls from the two rows of passages 742 are alternately dropped in a line at the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described next. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arc-shaped gear cover 746 at its upper surface.

[1-3 E. Ball passage unit]
Next, a ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a row from the tank rail member 740 to the winning ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the award ball unit 800. It is a side view for explaining. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the gear ball 866, the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841, and the unit sub plate 825 are removed from the prize ball unit 800, and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 is depicted in an easy-to-understand manner. is there. However, gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dashed lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the ball passage unit 770 of this example, a ball drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent on the back surface (a surface seen from the back surface is called the surface) of a substantially rectangular plate. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front and rear bending passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front and rear direction (the depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front and rear bending passage portion 772a. It comprises a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in a direction (left and right as viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and substantially vertical.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), since the position of the upper end inlet 773 which falls from the tank rail member 740 mentioned above is the approximate center of the two rows of the passages 742 as shown in FIG. Since the back side of the upper rear surface wall 545 of the frame 3 and the rear surface wall 546 on the support side is away from the front surface, the prize ball guide projections provided on the front and rear bent passage portion 772 a and the rear support wall s The ball drop passage 772 is bent in the front-rear direction so as to be close to the surface of the pivoting side rear face wall 546. In addition, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bending passage portion 772b is formed in a U-shape so as to fill the substantially horizontal width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the force of the ball which has dropped from the tank rail member 740. It is formed by bending.

  Furthermore, although the vertical passage portion 772c is also formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly gently curved, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one of the bent passage walls 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A broken ball detection piece 776 whose upper end is pivotally supported by a support shaft 777 is attached pivotably at 775. A ball breakage switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball breakage detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball breakage switch 778 is in contact with the ball breakage detection piece 776. The broken ball detection unit 776 and the broken ball switch 778 constitute a broken ball detection mechanism for detecting broken balls in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball breakage detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and pushes the actuator 779 to turn on the ball breakage switch 778. Since the broken ball detection piece 776 swings toward the inside of the vertical passage portion 772c when the ball disappears in the portion 772c due to the ball clogging or the ball shortage, the actuator 779 turns the ball broken switch 778 OFF. When the out-of-ball switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 described later is stopped and the payout of the prize balls is stopped.

  A stopper projection 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 in order to prevent excessive swinging of the broken ball detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 is provided with a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogged insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 when it is difficult for the ball crush detection piece 776 to swing due to a ball clog or the like, and the ball clog detection ball 776 is clogged. To eliminate the problem of Furthermore, the other bending passage wall 771 facing the broken ball detection piece 776 is formed to bulge slightly toward the broken ball detection piece 776 side. This is for reliably pressing the broken ball detection piece 776 to turn on the broken ball switch 778 when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Further, in the ball passage unit 770, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed at a position avoiding the ball drop passage 772 described above. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574 formed on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is a passage unit similarly formed on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 It corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the locking hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while engaging the positioning boss 783 with the positioning pin 574 This can be done by screwing the screw 784 from the locking hole 782 in the state. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 engaging with the engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side thereof, and for connecting with the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connection lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting like an arc on the back surface of a rectangular plate material, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 is formed. The projection shaft 789 as a rotation shaft portion which is provided to project from the end of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connection lid member 786 is fitted to the support projection 787 as the shaft support portion which is provided to project from the left and right ends Thus, it is pivotally supported pivotally. Further, the connecting lid member 786 is extended downward of the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 is in communication with the downstream end of the ball falling passage 772 (FIG. 105B). The state shown) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 does not communicate with the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 (the state shown in FIG. 105A) can be turned by opening. At the time of transition from the open state to the closed state, a guide projection 791 for guiding the support piece 788 of the connection lid member 786 is provided to project from the lower end portion of the rear surface of the ball passage unit 770.

  In a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the pivotally supported rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 and a state in which the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted to the pivotally rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105) In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed, and the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball are locked by locking the rear surface with the locking elastic claw 820 provided on the winning ball unit 800. A passage wall 790 communicates with the bending passage 803 of the unit 800 so that the ball falling in the ball falling passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bending passage 803 of the winning ball unit 800. The reason for providing the pivoting connection lid member 786 to the ball passage unit 770 in this way is that the prize ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as described later The space formed between the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800 due to the attachment to the ball does not inhibit the smooth falling of the ball.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 provided in the ball passage unit 770, the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 is provided so as to be gradually lowered toward the downstream side. By inserting the prize ball guiding projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball dropping passage 772 is back-faced so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball dropping passage 772 is located approximately at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front and rear bent passage portion 772a bent in the front and rear direction as seen from the figure. Thus, in a configuration in which the balls flowing downward in two rows are alternately sent one by one to the award ball unit 800 side by the pair of alignment gears 747, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the award ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772 Can. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced and the ball drop passage 772 is assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Also, the ball falling from the tank rail member 740 through the front and rear bending passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left and right bending passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . Further, a ball breakage detecting mechanism (ball breakage detecting piece 776 and ball breakage switch 778) for detecting a ball breakage is provided in the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the force is weakened. In this way, it is possible to reliably detect that the ball in the ball drop passage 772 has broken, in other words, that the ball supplied to the prize ball unit 800 has broken (ball breakage).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-mentioned ball passage unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit 800 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the dispensing motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a dispensing member. FIG. 109 is a rear view for illustrating the passage and driving relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG.

  In FIG. 106, the prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 having a bending passage 803 forming a ball passage by a pair of bending passage walls 802, a prize ball passage 810, and a ball extraction passage 811; The unit sub plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub board 825, the relay terminal plate 830 within the prize ball unit attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825, and the substantially central surface area (rear surface side region) And a gear cover 866 covering the detection disc 850 (rotational transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages protruding toward the plate unit sub plate 825 side. The wall 802 forms a bending passage 803. The bending passage wall 802 is protruded at a slightly larger distance than the diameter of the sphere from the upper center to the middle of the upper side of the unit base body 801, but the middle to the middle The side walls of both ends of the unit base body 801 also function from the lower end to the downstream end. Further, a portion where the middle bending passage wall 802 is largely divided into right and left constitutes a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 as a ball feeding rotary body is disposed, and from the lower part of the distribution space 805, the unit base body 801 A passage section wall 809 is formed so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 which are divided into right and left by the downstream end of the.

  That is, two passages are formed on the left and right from the distribution space 805 by the left and right bent passage walls 802 and the passage section walls 809 from the middle to the downstream side, and one of the passages constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage constitutes a ball removal passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided to the left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed in a motor housing space 814 formed at a position avoiding the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the award ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. It is fixed. The bending passage 803 is formed in a serpentine shape so as to reduce pressure on the sprocket 807 of the ball staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 is for storing small dust and the like that has entered the inside of the bending passage 803, so that dust and the like accumulated when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3 can be taken out.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a dispensing member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) recesses in which balls are fitted on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing sleeve 806 for supporting the other end of the rotating shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side is formed. , And the counting switch 812 is detachably mounted.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the tip, and a switch fitting recess 865 conforming to the shape of the rear end is formed by the bent passage wall 802 By doing this, it can be easily and removably attached. A wire (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a relay terminal board 830 in a prize ball unit described later. Further, on the downstream side of the curved passage wall 802 constituting the award ball passage 810, a locking claw engaged with the locking portion 860 formed on the passage cover plate portion 859 integrally formed with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality 813 is formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 engaged with one locking portion 860 on the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  Further, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 is formed. The cylindrical main body of the dispensing motor 815 is accommodated in the inside of the housing. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed by a screw 817 to the back surface side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 by the pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface. Then, in a state where the dispensing motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the dispensing motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 The gear 843 is fixed.

  Further, by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841, a space in the depth width direction in which the above-mentioned bent passage 803, award ball passage 810 and ball release passage 811 are formed. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated and disposed therein. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the above-described sprocket 807 is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, a guiding protrusion 819 for guiding the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extracting passage 811 to the back surface side of the winning ball unit 800 is projected on the unit base body 801. The induced ball is guided to a ball connection passage 880 to be described later and is finally released to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection weir provided below the island platform). Further, on the upper part of the unit base body 801, a locking elastic claw 820 for locking the connection lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 described above is provided in a protruding manner, and the prize ball unit 800 is supported on the pivotally supporting side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting a button insertion engagement hole 821 and a hook-like engagement portion 824 for detachably attaching to the rear wall 546, and the gear cover 866 in a state in which the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 are held. Is provided.

  A rod-like detachable button 822 is provided slidably on the upper side of the unit base body 801 in the button insertion engagement hole 821 so as to be slidable in the depth width direction, and as described later, its front end Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 is concave so that the tip end portion of the locking elastic claw 564 is inserted. Further, the hook-like engagement portion 824 engages with the engagement protrusion 565 formed on the pivotally supporting rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the pivotally support rear surface wall 546 The hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement projection 565 engage with each other by pressing downward. Then, since the locking elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged in the engaged state, the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 can not be performed.

  The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 is formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. In addition, a mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 in a state in which the unit sub plate 825 is held is protruded long toward the rear surface side, and a through hole drilled in the unit sub plate 825 After penetrating through 858, screwing the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 in correspondence with the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are connected while holding the unit sub plate 825 doing.

  The configuration of unit sub plate 825 covering unit base body 801 described above will be described. The unit sub plate 825 is a composite that covers bending passage 803 portion of unit base body 801, distribution space 805 portion, and award ball passage 810 portion. It is configured by attaching an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 to which a dispensing motor 815 is attached to a resin plate member and which covers the downstream portion of the ball removal passage 811. Then, on the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub plate 825, a relay substrate region 826 for attaching the in-a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 under it. A gear area 840 is formed in which 844, 847 and a detection disc 850 are attached.

  The relay substrate area 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit are protruded along the square shape, and the upper and lower sides of one vertical side thereof will be described later. An engaging groove 828 to be engaged with the engaging projection 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw 829 to be engaged with the locking projection 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other vertical side. There is. Further, in the relay substrate area 826, there are formed a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss 832 for fixing the in-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with a screw (not shown). .

  The inter-prize-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the above-described relay substrate area 826 will be described later, including the counting switch 812 provided on the prize-ball unit 800, the payout motor 815, and the rotation angle switch 855 described later. For relaying the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126), a plurality of connectors are provided for that purpose, and the button insertion hole 833 and the mounting boss portion 832 through which the mounting and demounting button 822 is inserted. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are drilled. Thus, the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown) in a state where the inter-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the mounting rib 827 of the relay substrate area 826 The ball unit internal relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub plate 825.

  Also, the inter-prize-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered by the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one side vertical side of the base cover 835 and a substantially central side of the other side vertical side. ing. In addition, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement projections 836 of the substrate cover 835 are inserted into and engaged with the engagement grooves 828 of the relay substrate area 826, the engagement projections 837 and the engagement claws 829 are easily engaged. The base member cover 835 can cover the in-ball unit inner relay terminal plate 830. Conversely, in the case of removal, the locking claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the locking projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally to the front side to engage the engagement protrusion 836 and the engagement groove portion 828. It can be disengaged from the In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 is inserted through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838 There is. Further, the wiring connected to the in-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844 and 847 provided in the gear area 840 formed on the unit sub plate 825 and the detection disc 850 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the dispensing motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825 The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. A second gear 844 (rotational transmission gear) meshing with the first gear 843 is pressed into one end on the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 above the first gear 843 and is a shaft in which an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 is drilled. A third gear 847 (rotational transmission gear) meshing with the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the unit sub plate 825, above the second gear 844. It is rotatably provided on a shaft 848 which is press-fitted into a shaft hole 849 to be formed. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (following gear) meshing with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 808 for supporting the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip of motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in the receiving hole formed in gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into and supported by a bearing sleeve 806 formed at the unit base body 801 at one end, and supported at a bearing hole formed at the gear cover 866 at the other end. A sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in a distribution space 805 through an axial through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and a detection disc 850 is formed in a space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface of the detection disc 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disc 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is supposed to rotate Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disc 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed a size larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion projecting outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the concave portion of the sprocket 807 (in the case shown , Three detection notches 851 are formed. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emission / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotational position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate attachment portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub plate 825 It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is used to monitor whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 detected within a predetermined interval time during the dispensing operation. Temporarily, when abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (mostly in the ball biting state by the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and reverse a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, ball biting state) It is The number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the above-mentioned winning ball passage 810 and used for counting. In addition, as shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also held by the substrate attachment portion formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, among the plurality of gears provided in the gear area 840, the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotation shaft 845 pressed into the gear cover 866, and the gear cover 866 covering the gear area 840. The mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 protruding from the unit base body 801 and penetrating the through hole 858 of the unit sub plate 825. Then, while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub plate 825 side, the mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned. By screwing with a screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is held, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed. In addition, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 inside the winning ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal plate 830 inside the winning ball unit and the payout control board 1186 described later) A wire processing piece 869 is provided to project and hold.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above, but in the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub plate 825, the in-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830, the substrate cover 835 and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is positioned so as to be accommodated below the bending passage 803 where the ball to be dispensed is guided. Further, in the unit base body 801, the sprocket 807 disposed in the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the award ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) and the ball width of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein is provided, and the unit sub plate 825 rotates the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-closing surface side to rotate the sprocket 807 A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844 and 847, and gear portion 852 of detection disc 850) for transmitting to shaft 808 is provided, and in discharge space 805 of dispensing motor 815 and bending passage 803 A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear area 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub plate 825, and a sprocket 807 as a dispensing member to be disposed It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disc 850) connecting the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 The prize ball unit 800 can be thinner than in the case where a part of the dispensing motor or the sprocket is disposed outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further reduced in thickness by forming the ball passages (the flex passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball withdrawal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in the form of a single passage. Is being promoted. That is, unlike the conventional case where the payout motor 815 is protruded to the front side, the rear side or the side of the winning ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the pivoting rear side wall 546 of the main body frame 3 Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be configured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the dispensing motor 815 slightly protrudes from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is, as shown in FIG. Since the front portion of the main body frame 3 is faced from the lower portion for the discharge motor relief opening 572, the projection amount is a degree obtained by subtracting the plate thickness dimension of the axially supported rear surface wall 546 from the protrusion dimension as a result Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the pivotally supported rear face wall 546 is slight. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the gaming board 4 is provided between the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the winning ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. The storage space for storing the rearward projecting portion of the gaming apparatus can be made large in the depth and width directions.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The lower end of the winning ball unit 800 is hooked to the locking groove 573 and the winning ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projection 565. It is pushed down while being in close contact with the side rear surface wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the winning ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projection 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. The lock elastic claws 564 are engaged with the button insertion engagement holes 821 in order to prevent the respective engaged states from being easily released by moving the prize ball unit 800 upward. It is supposed to

  That is, by the engagement of the locking elastic claws 564 with the button insertion engagement holes 821, the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 in the mounted state is prevented. In this manner, after the winning ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, thereby causing the ball fall of the ball passage unit 770. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the curved passage 803 of the winning ball unit 800 can be communicated via the passage formed by the pair of passage walls 790. Further, when the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 and the prize ball inlet 927 of the full unit 900 described later are connected, and the downstream end of the ball withdrawal passage 811 is the ball withdrawal connection passage. It is connected with the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the locking elastic claws 820 is released and the connection lid member 786 is pivoted to the front side, and then the mounting / dismounting button 822 is pressed to lock the elastic claws 564 for locking. The ball is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the locking elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled up with the attaching / detaching button 822 kept pressed, to thereby obtain the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement of the lower end portion of the hook with the locking groove 573 and the engagement of the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement projection 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, the prize ball unit 800 is It can be easily removed.

[1-3 G. Full tank unit]
Subsequently, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described winning ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the full tank unit 900 as viewed from the back, and FIG. 114 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the far port 610, FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view cut at the bottom swinging plate 907 portion provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the far port 610.

  The filling unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the filling unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above, and as shown in FIG. A cover 926 covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is designed such that the balls flowing in from the downstream end of the winning ball passage 810 are guided in a zigzag manner and discharged from the outlet 921. For this reason, a lateral guiding passage 902 is formed at the upstream portion thereof for guiding the balls flowing from the prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 laterally from one end to the other end. At one end immediately below the award ball inlet 927 of the side guide passage 902, a side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the ball laterally is provided. A shock absorbing member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the nozzle 902 for receiving the impact of the ball flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guiding the ball downstream.

  Also, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is induced to flow in the direction opposite to the flow of the ball in the side guide passage 902 after changing its direction to the downstream side. A reverse side induction passage 905 is formed. The balls having flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 are then led to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the prize of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. You will be led to the ball contact 343.

  A bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the upstream bottom surface of the reverse side induction passage 905, and the bottom surface rocking plate 907 swingably closes the bottom surface opening 906. There is. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape whose upper surface is opened, and a pair of pivotally supporting projections 911 project from the side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the inside. In addition, a circular spring placement recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom of the bottom opening 906. On the other hand, a bottom rocking plate 907 closing the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and a semicircular bearing supported by being fitted to the pivoting protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the back side downstream side A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring engagement projection 910 with which the upper end of the spring 913 is engaged is provided to project downward at the center of the back surface of the bottom surface swinging plate 907. Therefore, the bottom swinging plate 907 is biased by the biasing force of the spring 913 such that the upstream side is always swung upward. In the spring 913, the bottom swinging plate 907 does not swing downward even when the number of paid out prize balls (for example, 15 pieces) is placed on the bottom swinging plate 907 at one time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or more than the number of dispensed pieces are formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom surface swinging plate 907. Further, on the upstream side of the bottom swinging plate 907, a detection protrusion 909 is projected forward. The detection projection 909 penetrates the communication hole 929 and is positioned in the switch housing space 914 which will be described next, when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom surface rocking plate 907 is rotatably supported on the shaft support projection 911. It has become.

  A switch storage space 914 for storing a full tank switch 916 is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, the switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the switch storage space 914 at the upper end of the reverse side induction passage 905 A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 for holding the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch including a light projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Furthermore, a far ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the far ball passage 922 is formed by bending so that the far ball inlet 923 on the upstream side communicates with the above-described far port 610 and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guiding passage 920. It is done. For this reason, the farball taken into the far mouth 610 is guided to the front guidance passage 920 through the farball passage 922 which is bent from the farball inlet 923, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball contact 343 as a dish unit. It is returned to 300.

  Further, in the box main body 901, an engagement piece 924 which is engaged with a unit engagement groove 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923 A hooking projection 925 is formed which engages with a hooking piece 928 formed on the lid 926. The hooking projections 925 are appropriately formed on upper left and right rear side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape to cover the upper surfaces of the side induction passage 902, the reverse side induction passage 905, the front induction passage 920, and the far ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball inlet 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end 902. Further, around the lid 926, a hooking piece 928 for engaging with the hooking projection 925 of the box main body 901 is protruded downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the winning ball passage 810 of the winning ball unit 800 are on the upstream side of the side guidance passage 902 from the winning ball inlet 927. It is guided laterally by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball that has collided with the buffer member 904 is guided downstream as it is in the reverse lateral guiding passage 905 in the opposite direction to the guiding direction of the side guiding passage 902 and is guided to the front guiding passage 920. From the exit 921, it is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the ball of the far ball entering from the far ball inlet 923 is also weakened by the bent far ball passage 922 and joins the forward guiding passage 920, and from the exit 921 of the forward guiding passage 920 through the prize ball connection 343 It is led to the dish unit 300.

  When the ball flows naturally from inside the side induction passage 902 to the reverse side induction passage 905 when the ball naturally flows in the full tank unit 900 under normal conditions, it falls to the bottom swinging plate 907. Since the resilient force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of paid-out balls is about normal, the bottom swinging plate 907 does not swing, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. The switch enters between the light emitter and the light receiver of the full tank switch 916 so that the switch does not conduct (OFF). On the other hand, when the winning balls are stored in the tray unit 300 and the balls are filled in the full tank unit 900, the bottom swing formed in the entire upstream side of the front guide passage 920 and the reverse side guide passage 905. The bottom swinging plate 907 swings downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 by the pressure of the ball stored on the moving plate 907, and as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It comes out from between the light emitter and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 916, and the switch is in a conductive state (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational drive of the payout motor 815 of the winning ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of winning balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of winning balls Is to be stopped after being paid out.

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is performed by the bottom swing plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the passage bottom of the passage (in the illustrated case, the opposite side induction passage 905) where the ball flows down. 916 is actuated and the biasing member (spring 913) urges the bottom swing plate 907 to swing when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the flow of the ball at the normal time Therefore, the ball clogged is not detected due to the ball clogged as compared to the conventional case where the ball clogged is detected by the ball clumped on the bottom surface of a portion of the passage etc. It can be reliably prevented. This is something which can reliably detect the fullness of the ball.

  Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, since the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 is detachably attached, the full tank apparatus is formed in the main body frame as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared to one assembled inside the dispensing passage. In addition, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. There is no chance that the winning balls will fly out of the dish unit 300. Furthermore, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, since the far ball passage 922 guiding the far ball is arranged to weaken and join the ball in the middle of the forward guiding passage 920 that pays out the winning balls. Feal spheres can be merged without disturbing the flow of the spheres.

[1-4. Lock device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached vertically along the rear side end side on the open side of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3. FIG. 118 is an enlarged side cross sectional view showing the hooking structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut horizontally in a position slightly lower than the longitudinal center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows the detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the lock device 1000, a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view seen from the rear side of the lock device 1000 (A FIG. 123 is a perspective view (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding wedge 1040 and a main frame sliding wedge 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3 from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 and, as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated case) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and the upper and lower end portions between the rising portion of the first side wall 540 and the upper portion of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, which will be described next, is supported by a lock attachment hole 547 which is formed by being notched in the middle and a lock attachment hole 547 which is formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 bends metal so as to become U-shaped in cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are provided slidably therein. The width dimension is extremely thin compared to a conventional lock device integrated on a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. This makes the size of the game board 4 extremely large in the left and right direction and the vertical direction as described above, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is large. A mounting structure that allows the lock device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by forming a smaller width dimension of the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. Then, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, so in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 The sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 have an anti-tampering structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook through opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 are penetrated is established at the upper and lower sides of the U-shaped base 1001 opposite to the open side. And a screw fixing portion 1003 is horizontally provided in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 123) in close contact with the first side wall 540, and the side surface 1001a does not contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed protruding from the upper end portion and the middle portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking projection 1004 is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (Refer to FIG. 118). In this state, since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment hole 547 coincide with each other, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) It can be fixed. In addition, attachment by screw of lock device 1000 is formed not only at the upper and middle screw stop portion 1003 but also in the upper vicinity of screw stop portion 1003 and cylinder lock through hole 526 formed on lock attachment piece 1008 described later. The lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 corresponding to the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, at the time of the attachment, the locking projections 1004 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 and positioned and locked. Screws 1003 formed at two points on the closed side (rear part) of the base 1001 and screws 1003 formed on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 into the lock mounting holes 547 Since the structure is fixed by a screw, the front part of the lock device 1000 is locked by the locking projection 1004 and the lock hole 548, and the rear portion of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower part of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment hole 547, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width dimension, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear portions of the lock device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (or the fixing structure) of the front part is provided so as to protrude on the side surface 1001 a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. And the screwing portion 1003 and the screwing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed to protrude horizontally from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  In addition, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper part, middle part and lower part of both side faces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are formed on the U-shaped base 1001. By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in a stored state and caulking it, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001. it can. That is, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are formed one each for the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, lower portions of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050, respectively. The rivet 1006 penetrates the long holes for rivets 1055 and 1061 so that the door frame sliding wedge 1040 can move upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050, as shown in FIG. 122 (C). A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Furthermore, in the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side, and the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 is protruded in a lateral direction, and further, an insertion longitudinal opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are provided on the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retracts. This point will be described in detail later. Also, with the lock attachment piece 1008 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the front end of the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 is positioned lower than the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510. The lock attachment piece 1008 is provided with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 passes, and an attachment hole formed in the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are drilled at two upper and lower positions, and further, a screw stop portion 1003 for mounting the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is drilled.

  In addition, the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 is an opening for the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 to enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamperproof members 1023 and 1032, and the escape lateral hole 1022 forms an escape hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  Referring to the cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 described above, the cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011 and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body is a lock attachment substrate An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 which engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when it is rotated, and the other end The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when the side is rotated. In the cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009, and the attachment holes 1013 and the lock attachment piece 1008 are formed in the upper and lower two places of the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by aligning the mounting hole 1014 with the mounting hole 1014 and screwing with a screw 1012.

  Next, the tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are provided to prevent the body frame slide rod 1050 from being improperly lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. . Thus, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate configured to be swingable around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 described above is the swing shaft hole 1025. Of the insertion holes 1005 and the rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050, the mounting holes 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached by the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006.

  Further, in the first fraud prevention member 1023, a vertically long projecting piece insertion hole 1026 overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 is opened in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 is inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. It is supposed to be able to That is, the second engagement projection 1018 penetrates through the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, whereby the elevation engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is adapted to be engaged. In addition, an outer outline obliquely above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 abuts on the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, and when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 The first fraud preventing member 1023 swings (clockwise in FIG. 125 (B)) about the swinging shaft hole 1025 by the contact.

  Furthermore, a stopper piece portion 1027 is provided on the outer contour of the first fraud prevention member 1023 at a position obliquely below the protrusion insertion hole 1026, and a restriction projection piece 1031 is provided below the stopper piece portion 1027. Pin holes 1029 and connection holes 1030 are formed at the top and the bottom of the projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 enters the engagement prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is incorrect. To prevent sliding. In addition, although the control protrusion 1031 is connected by the spring 1035 with the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, when the spring 1035 is connected, the biasing direction of the second fraud prevention member 1032 To regulate the movement of In the pin hole 1029, the guide pin 1028 is inserted, with the guide pin 1028 inserted, with the guide pin 1028 being fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first tamper resistant member 1023. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  The second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the above-described first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of a reverse "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed in the upper one end, and a spring engagement is formed in the upper other end A stop hole 1036 is bored and an abutment 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is made to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and to be connected by the connection pin 1034, and the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base 1001 at one end. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. The contact portion 1037 is in contact with a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The actions of the above-described first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally integrated toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. It is protrusively installed. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame It projects forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the front door 3 and is locked to a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 is engaged with the hook cover 158 by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. It can be released.

  Further, a vertically long rivet long hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole for the top of the rivet long hole 1042 is formed. A guide projection 1043 is provided at the lower side of the lower portion 1042 of the sliding door 1040 and the lower end of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which a rivet 1006 to be inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is penetrated, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the upward movement of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. It is vertically formed. Then, in the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating and in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042. Further, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050, and the sliding ridge 1040 for the door frame The sliding action between the body and the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is a sliding wedge 1050 for the main frame. The spring hook portion 1057 formed on the upper hook member 1051 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is biased downward and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is biased upward. A contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape in the middle of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. The contact elastic piece 1047 is formed into a convex shape by being punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by pressing, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 for the door frame internally. It is intended to prevent the sliding wedge 1040 from rattling.

  Further, both longitudinal play holes 1044 and upward engagement holes 1045 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the free end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is moved so that the play hole 1044 does not get in the way of its rotation operation. Make up a space to In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 is engaged such that the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is lifted by its turning operation. It is to do. A relief notch 1049 which is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed at the lower rear of the vertical side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. The relief notch portion 1049 is formed so as not to disturb the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 in order to reliably engage the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; It consists of That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is not necessarily constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are metal A plate made of aluminum is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 protruding rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projection moving hole 1056 are formed in the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connection hole 1058 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and a contact portion 1059 is further formed at the upper side and the lower side. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing projection 38 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side, and the hook portion is upward. It is formed.

  The rivet long hole 1055 corresponds to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and in the normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet long hole 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet elongated hole 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. In the protrusion moving hole 1056, the guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted as described above, and the mutual movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is performed. It is supposed to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is one in which the other end of the spring 1048 is locked as described above. The connection hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053. Furthermore, when the contact portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 is performed smoothly and without rattling. In order to

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion, and the rivet elongated hole 1061, the lowering engagement hole 1062, the play hole 1063 and the projection are projected from the upper to the lower of the plate surface portion. A connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front longitudinal side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower end of the rear longitudinal side, and the upper side and the lower side A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 is engaged with the closing projection 41 provided on the lower side of the open side of the outer frame 2 through the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001, and the hook portion is upward. It is formed. The rivet long hole 1061 corresponds to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and in a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet long hole 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lower end of the rivet elongated hole 1061.

  Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. The lower engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by its turning operation when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and turned. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip end portion of the second engagement projection 1018 so as not to disturb the turning operation when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. In the protrusion moving hole 1064, the guide protrusion 1043 below the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted as described above, and the mutual movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is performed. It is supposed to guide you. Further, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1060. Further, when the contact portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is performed smoothly and without rattling. In order to

  As mentioned above, although each member which constitutes lock device 1000 was explained, in order to assemble this lock device 1000, upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 of sliding lever 1050 for main frames are connected with connecting wire rod 1053 In that state, the guide projection 1043 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length Holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the overlapped state. While the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001 You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. However, when inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Before attaching the first tamperproof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamperproof member 1023 and the second tamperproof member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 has to be inserted into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036 to form a second fraud prevention member 1032 Is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tamper resistant member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is formed on the body frame 3 The locking projection 1004 projecting like a hook is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 while being inserted into the hook hole 549 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 and the screwing are horizontally protruded in that state. By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, as shown in FIG. 117, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 . In the case of the present embodiment, in particular, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001, The screwing portion 1003 and the screwing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the present invention are formed to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the first side wall 540.

  The operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening and closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening and closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state in which the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are engaged, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are engaged. There is. As shown in FIG. 124B, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction of entering the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in that state, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 and pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the biasing force of the spring 1048, and The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and descended. As a result, since the locking projections of the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are released, the main frame is pulled by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be released to the outer frame 2.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 124A). 1065, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are closed by the projections 38 and 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the body frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, the upward claws of the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing projections 38, 41 are engaged again. The main frame sliding rod 1050 ascends and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, so pulling the door frame 5 to the front side causes the door frame 5 to be released. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 158 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. Since the sliding door for door frame 1040 ascends upward, the sliding hook 1040 of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 is lowered to return to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, locking in the entire length in the vertical direction of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is securely performed, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are forcibly opened up and the illegal act of inserting illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval There is also the advantage that it can not be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing this, the locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 can be released. In this case, a piano wire or the like may be hooked on hooks 1054, 1065 of the main frame sliding lever 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, and an illegal act of lowering this may be performed. It is supposed that you can not do such cheating. The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 It is in the state of contact. In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 becomes the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. For this reason, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding wedge 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It can not be taken down (unlocked) illegally, and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing about 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to retract from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 It can be opened.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . Therefore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, for the door frame provided inside Since the sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, they are completely covered. Even when trying to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the closed space of the incorrect tool is made by the both sides 1001a and 1001b Since the intrusion is blocked, it has a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, as described in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment is used for the door frame inside of the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin compared to the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidingly setting the sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 and for operating the lock device 1000 is lower than the lower edge of the game board Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the up and down direction is made extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly to the back of 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of section U-shaped faces the back of body frame 3, in the state where lock device 1000 was attached to body frame 3, sliding frame 1040 for door frames provided in the inside and the body The frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. Therefore, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Fraudulent acts such as pulling down the frame sliding rod 1050 can not be easily performed.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, locking projections 1004 formed at three places on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 and positioned and locked. The lock device 1000 has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle, and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws. The front part of the lock is locked by the lock projection 1004 and the lock lock hole 548, and the rear part of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the above embodiment, the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to form a screwing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder frame through hole 526 of the main body frame 3. Instead of the screw mounting hole 547 being screwed, the tip of the screw 1012 passes through the lock mounting piece 1008 using the screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008. The lock mounting holes to be screwed may be formed on the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 526. Also, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be mounted on the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the back of the locking device 1000 and the lock mounting hole 547. It has been confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the embodiment described above, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. A sliding door 1040 for the door frame and a sliding door 1050 for the main frame are attached to the opposite side 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 by means of rivets etc. L-shaped base (lock base), and the closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 for the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main body frame The sliding rod 1050 may be housed. Even in this case, the mounting structure and the fraud prevention structure similar to those of the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 1100 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front side FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder that is the main component of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the substrate unit, FIG. 132 is a rear view of the substrate unit, and FIG. 133 is a rear view of the substrate unit with the payout control substrate box and the terminal substrate box removed. FIG. 135 is a schematic view showing the connection relationship of each substrate provided in the substrate unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing an electrical connection between the substrate unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a payout control substrate and the substrate unit of 137 is a part of a rear view of a pachinko machine showing lines etc. FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional location of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed in FIGS. 137 is a front view of the game board incorporating the prevention mechanism, and FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C of FIG.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in a plurality of lower portions on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, Attach the various boards of the door relay board 1102, the power supply board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, the payout control board box 1105, the main drawer relay board 1107, and the sub drawer relay board 1108 to the resin molded frame substrate holder 1101. It is composed of Among the above-mentioned substrates, the door relay substrate 1102, the power supply substrate box 1103, the terminal substrate box 1104 and the delivery control substrate box 1105 are redundantly attached in the front and rear direction to the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, and the main drawer relay The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As described later, since the power supply substrate 1136 creates and supplies +34 V, +18 V, and +9 V, it is a very high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply substrate 1136 is increased. For this reason, by overlappingly attaching the payout control board box 1105 for housing the payout control board 1186 on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103, it is not necessary to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply substrate 1136 and the like and to radiate the heat generated from the power supply substrate 1136. The main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are covered with a substrate cover 1109 and attached. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 127 and 129, the shield heat dissipating plate 1106 in the present embodiment radiates the heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply substrate box 1103 to the outside (outside air). The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106 a. The heat transmitted to the payout control substrate 1186 can be suppressed small by the shield heat sink 1106. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat radiation effect. In addition, it is desirable that the uneven surface 1106 a be formed vertically or obliquely so that heat is easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat dissipating plate 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply substrate 1136 and the like. As a result, the influence of noise due to electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, so that malfunction of the payout control substrate 1186 housed in the payout control substrate box 1105 due to the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat radiation function of the shield heat radiation plate 1106 is not only between the power supply substrate box 1103 and the delivery control substrate box 1105, but also when a plurality of other substrate boxes are redundantly attached to the frame substrate holder 1101. This is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as in this embodiment between the lower substrate box and the upper substrate box.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed in one rear side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay substrate recess 1110 for attaching the door relay substrate 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square-shaped recess so as to conform to the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102, and the upper and lower sides in the relay substrate recess 1110 are the back surface of the door relay substrate 1102. Of the door relay substrate 1102 is formed in the recess 1110 for the relay substrate, and the detent 1111 is formed to be engaged with the surface of one side vertical side of the door relay substrate 1102 in a state where the door relay substrate 1102 is accommodated in the relay substrate recess 1110. ing. Further, mounting bosses 1112 for engaging with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply substrate box 1103 and fastening with screws (not shown) are provided on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 1110 near the outside. It is protrusively installed.

  In addition, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting the wires to be passed inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to protrude in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hooked between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece ing. Furthermore, the region from the top of the relay substrate recess 1110 of the frame substrate holder 1101 to a portion slightly closer to the other end than the approximate center becomes a region for mounting the power supply substrate box 1103 (lower region on the right side described below) On the upper and lower sides thereof, contact protrusions 1115 that contact the back surface of the power supply substrate box 1103 are provided in a protruding manner. Therefore, in the state where power supply substrate box 1103 is mounted in contact with contact protrusion 1115 in the power supply substrate box attachment area, there is a space between the back surface of power supply substrate box 1103 and the vertical surface of frame substrate holder 1101. Wirings for connecting the substrates to each other are accommodated in the space, and two accommodated wiring processing pieces 1114 are capable of locking and collecting the accommodated wirings.

  From the other end side of the region to which the power supply substrate box 1103 is attached to the other end side (left side in FIG. 130) of the frame substrate holder 1101, the amount of backward protrusion is formed large. That is, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a step shape that is high on the left side and low on the right side at a position slightly left from the center when viewed from the back, and the low region on the right side is for mounting the power supply substrate box 1103 (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as "power supply substrate box attachment region"). Then, on the other end side of the power supply substrate box attachment area, an insertion port 1115a is formed into which insertion protrusions 1134 which are provided to protrude above and below the other end of the power supply substrate box 1103 are inserted. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply substrate box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion opening 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply substrate box 1103 are attached to the mounting boss 1112 from above The power supply substrate box 1103 can be fixed to the frame substrate holder 1101 by inserting and fixing with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above-described step-like high region is one of the regions for attaching the dispensing control substrate box 1105 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "dispensing substrate substrate mounting region") The L-shaped concave wiring arrangement space 1116 is formed in part of the step-like high region. Wiring openings 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) are formed on the bottom of the wiring arrangement space 1116, and the wiring held by the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply substrate box mounting area is It is pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 from the wiring arrangement space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121. Further, on the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control substrate box mounting area, a locking projection 1117 for engaging the engaging elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 is formed to protrude. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 128, FIG. 129 and FIG. 131, the out ball passage 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located on the downstream side of the out-port 606 (see FIG. 78) described above, the downstream side of the ball removal discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the upper side to correspond to the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is narrowly formed so as to discharge the balls in a row. Therefore, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support projection 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. And, from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball removing ball is released toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, a collection weir of an island).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 and on the front side corresponding to the dispensing control board box mounting area, a predetermined interval in the lateral direction between the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 in the upper area thereof A drawer attachment area 1120 is formed in an empty and parallel manner. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204, 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107, 1108 are penetrated to project drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the respective relay boards 1107, 1108, respectively. Bonding guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are formed at the upper and lower sides of the intermediate position of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joining guide holes 1126 are connected to the board unit 1100 with the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) and the game board 4 provided along with the work of attaching the game board 4 to the main frame 3. The junction guide projection 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 is inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. It is On the other hand, in the guide hole 1125, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) protruding from the main body frame 3 is inserted. It is intended to facilitate positioning work and installation work. In addition, mounting pieces 1122 for mounting the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are protruded toward the outside on the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, and the mounting holes 112 527 of the main body frame 3 are provided. The substrate unit 1100 is attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). Note that, as shown in FIG. 70, the mounting hole 527 is formed to have an outer peripheral wall that conforms to the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122. Further, on the outer side wall of the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101, a wire hooking piece 1123 for locking the wire is formed to protrude.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, but the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay substrate 1102 mounted on the relay substrate recessed portion 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay substrate 1102 is an internal connection terminal of multi-pin connector type. A door frame connection terminal 1131 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. The door frame connection terminal 1131 is provided on the door frame 5 as seen from the back as shown in FIG. 132 even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as the electric lamp component and the LED, which are made of lamps and LEDs, is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. Also, the internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to the door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 by the internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring arrangement space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 described above are laid.

  The power supply board box 1103 attached to the power supply board box mounting area on the rear side of the frame substrate holder 1101 has a box main body 1132 for fixing the power supply board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover for covering the box main body 1132 And 1133. In the box main body 1132, engaging and locking holes 1135 engaging with the mounting bosses 1112 are integrally formed at the upper and lower ends of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusions 1134 inserted at the upper and lower ends of the other end are integrally formed. Are formed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 133, power supply substrate 1136 is not covered by cover 1133 (on the right and left in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. 133, for power switch 1137, power line connector 1138, CR unit power connector 1139 and grounding. A connector 1140 and a payout control board power supply connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all the electric devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. Also, the power supply line connector 1138 connects the power supply wiring from the power supply wiring of AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied in the island, and grounds the noise etc. charged in the pachinko machine 1 as a frame ground to the outside Is a connector for The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card type ball rental machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The grounding connector 1140 is electrically connected to various grounding wires provided to the pachinko machine 1 for preventing electrostatic charge, and noise etc. which has entered the pachinko machine 1 is externally grounded via the power supply line connector 1138. Is a connector to Specifically, a ground wire for removing noise and the like from door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a ball flowing down tank rail member 740 A ground wire for removing the etc. is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as a frame ground FG1, and a ground wire for removing noise etc. from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as a frame ground FG1. , And a ground wire for removing noise and the like from the CR unit are electrically connected to the ground connector 1140 d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame grounds of the power supply line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame grounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the payout control board power supply connector 1141, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 3181 accommodated in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 accommodated in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186 by the power supply wiring 1214. Power supply etc.). The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the power supply connector for dispensing control substrate 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and pulled out from the back of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. There is. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover 1133 of the power supply substrate box 1103 is formed in a step-like shape, and the region where the step is high is the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal substrate box 1104. The lower area of the mounting area 1143 is a mounting area 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The mounting area 1143 constitutes a mounting area for mounting the horizontally long payout control board box 1105 together with the above-described payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101. An engagement hole 1146 is formed substantially at the center of the above-mentioned stepped portion, into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is engaged and inserted.

  In the cover body 1133 constituting the attachment area 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104, the positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engagement piece 1147 formed on the back side of the terminal board box 1104 respectively. And a mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section, while the mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous. After being inserted into the wide part of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece portion 1147 and the attachment engagement hole are made to slide in one direction (in the case shown, the central direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion of 1144 is engaged. When the hooking piece 1149 is provided at the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104 and the terminal board box 1104 is slidingly engaged with the cover 1133, the hooking piece 1149 is a delivery control board box 1105. And a portion of the box body 1180 of the Note that this engagement is such an engagement state that the terminal substrate box 1104 is easily disengaged by slidingly moving the terminal substrate box 1104 in the non-engagement direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the terminal board box 1104 has an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and a payout control board terminal 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152 and a power ground terminal 1153. Two substrates, a CR unit terminal plate 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a delivery control substrate terminal 1155, are accommodated in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a provide various information signals necessary for managing the pachinko machine 1 such as a big hit information output signal and a starting opening winning information output signal externally (for example, These information signals are mainly derived from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624, and the main drawer relay connector 1200 described later in detail. It is transmitted to the payout control substrate 1186 through the connection, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by the connection between the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control substrate terminal 1156 provided on the payout control substrate 1186. Ru. The power indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wire of the remaining number indicator of the prepaid card, the rental ball switch, and the return switch of the pachinko machine 1, for example, provided in the plate unit 300. . The power supply ground terminal 1153 is composed of two connectors, one of the connectors (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power supply connector 1139 of the power supply board 1136, and the other connector is the power supply board 1136 Wiring from one of the plurality of grounding connectors 1140 is connected. Furthermore, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wire from a CR unit (not shown), and by connecting the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control substrate 1186 and the payout control substrate terminal 1155. The delivery control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 is connected to the external terminal board 1150a for deriving game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Although both substrates of the CR unit terminal board 1150b to be relayed are housed, they are conventionally housed in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In the above, one terminal board box 1104 is assembled and attached to the frame substrate holder 1101. For this reason, in the case of the present embodiment, in particular, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which they are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected by wiring.

  Next, the delivery control board box 1105 which can be mounted across the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is mainly shown in FIGS. This will be described with reference to 132. The dispensing control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long rectangular dispensing control board 1186 is fixed with a screw or the like (not shown), and a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the dispensing control board 1186 It consists of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132) and caulked and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by the separation and cutting portion 1183. As a result, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation and cutting portion 1183 can not be separated unless it is cut. However, caulking and fixing at the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking one of a plurality of places (four places indicated by the numerals 1 to 4 in the case of the drawing) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to three times. Of course, in the case of fraudulent separation, it is possible to immediately know whether or not there has been an act of fraud since a trace of disconnection will remain. In the center of one short side of the box main body 1180, an engagement piece 1182 to be inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply substrate box 1103 is protrudingly formed, and at the lower side of the other short side. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed to be elastically engaged with the locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the dispensing control substrate box 1105 to the frame substrate holder 1101, after the engagement piece 1182 is inserted into the engagement hole 1146, the engagement elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the engagement projection 1117. It can be easily installed. Then, in a state where the delivery control board box 1105 is mounted over the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed in the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The dispensing control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it can not be moved in the horizontal direction or in the vertical direction. Conversely, when dismounting, pressing the engaging elastic piece 1184 in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to release the engagement between the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the payout control board box 1105, The withdrawal control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101 by pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146.

  Further, the dispensing control substrate 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 described above has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b at one side (right side in FIG. 132). There are provided a prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED display 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removing switch 4132. A full tank switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which the wiring from the door frame opening switch 4133 for detecting that the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame open switch terminal 1185 b is a connector to which the wiring from the main body frame open switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay substrate 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the delivery control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150 b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which the wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error release switch 4131 is operated, a guide of a release method according to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball extraction switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (the ball extraction is started). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to the inspection device when inspecting the dispensing control board 1186, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected by the power supply wiring 1214 to the payout control substrate power supply connector 1141 of the power supply substrate 1136 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which a wire from the launch motor 695 of the striking launch device 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which a wire from the touch sensor 420 and the emission stop switch 422 provided inside the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power wiring 1215.

  In the vicinity of the left of the error release switch 4131, resistors R1194a to R1194d are disposed as shown in FIG. The resistances R1194a to R1194d are ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) intrudes into various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. To prevent instability, the detailed description of which will be described later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to the main drawer connector 626 (game board connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal board 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4 A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) and a payout control board connector 1201 connected via the signal connection 1215 to the internal connection terminals 1195 of the payout control board 1186 are provided at the top and bottom. In addition, an auxiliary drawer relay connector 1202 is connected to the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108 with an auxiliary drawer connector 627 (game board connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal board 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A (holder-side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via the internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay substrate 1102 and the internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. Also, in the main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108, support holes 1204 and 1205 are drilled on the left and right sides of each substrate, and a drawer mounting boss is provided to project the support holes 1204 and 1205 in the drawer mounting region 1120. The main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub-drawer relay substrate 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer attachment area 1120 by being inserted into the housing 1118, and then firmly fixed by covering with the substrate cover 1109.

  By the way, in the board cover 1109, a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are provided with rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, and 1209 to project outside the substrate cover 1109, and a pin on which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back side of the substrate cover 1109 Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and at the left and right ends, fixing holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer attachment area 1120 by covering the base cover 1109 with the board cover 1109 while inserting and fixing the fixing hole 1211 with a screw (not shown).

  In the above, the configuration of the substrate unit 1100 has been described, but in the case of the present embodiment, among the various substrates necessary for controlling the driving of the pachinko machine 1, the main components to be replaced along with the change of the game board 4 A door relay board 1102 which is a board other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 3181, a power supply board 1136 accommodated in the power supply board box 1103, an external terminal board 1150 accommodated in the terminal board box 1104, and the dispensing control board box 1105 The assembled unit is assembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 in advance, and the assembled substrate unit 1100 is assembled into a unit by a simple operation of simply attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the back side lower portion of the main body frame 3. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was mounted on the back side of the frame 3 It can be. Further, in this case, since the wiring of each substrate to be unitized into the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated inside the frame substrate holder 1101, the wiring for connecting the substrates does not get messed up and disorderedly, and laying orderly can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main drawer relay board 1107 having the main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the substrate unit 1100 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 having the sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector) As shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal board 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3 as the game board 4 is mounted from the front side as shown in FIG. 626 and the secondary drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are respectively connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and the secondary drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), so the installation of the game board 4 and the connection between the boards Can be done at the same time. Therefore, the game board 4 can be replaced easily.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires a wiring connection with various electric devices provided in the main body frame 3 is A terminal board box 1104 requiring connection work with a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost easily visible position of the board unit 1100, while a power supply board with less need for connection work with the outside Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are disposed inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to be minimum. However, in the case of the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 which are disposed inside, all the terminal parts connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection with drawer connector)]
Next, the electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the substrate unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), by connecting the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side, electrical connection can be made. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are provided with terminals 626a and 627a as shown in FIG. 135 (b), and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As such, the contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side, as shown in FIG. 135 (c), the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into electrical conduction by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. Thereby, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side depend on various control boards (for example, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. Further, on the drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the substrate unit 1100 side, voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply substrate 1136 are formed. As described above, by detachably attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side. The supply line can be connected in a detachable manner.

  The terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a in this embodiment adopt a bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be accidentally touched and bent during operation, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small coefficient of friction is employed for plating the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment or detachment of the game board 4 is ensured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main unit frame 3 and the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 is turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a is performed, specifically, Since a large current (a rush current described later) flows in the contacts for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcedly pushed into the main frame 3 to attach it in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is the drawer connector 1200 when the game board 4 is removed from the main frame. It peels off from it and is damaged, and the drawer connector 1200 can not be used.

  In addition, if the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, the various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control substrate 4100 described later to cope with the problem. The detailed description will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring etc. with the prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control substrate 1186 stored in the payout control substrate box 1105 and the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit internal relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball breakage switch connector 830d, the grounding connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The wiring from the counting switch 812 is connected to the counting switch connector 830a, the wiring from the discharging motor 815 is connected to the dispensing motor connector 830b, and the wiring from the rotating angle switch 855 is connected to the rotation angle switch connector 830c. The ball disconnection switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball disconnection switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the grounding connector 830e is connected to the grounding wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control substrate connector 830f is connected to the winning ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control substrate 1186 by a wire (harness).

  Wiring from the counting switch 812, wiring from the dispensing motor 815, grounding wire from the dispensing motor 815, and the winning ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball breakage switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855 The harness is held together by a wiring processing piece 869.

  The balls supplied from the island are stored in the winning ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball passage unit 770, and guided to the winning ball unit 800 as described above. When the balls are charged against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball unit 800 is under the influence of noise and is in the file environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Further, the above-described harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the winning ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the winning ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 70 and 74. The cover body 1250 is for covering the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3 and is inserted from above into the cover body support cylindrical portion 575 formed on one side of the rear surface of the main body frame 3 at three locations The support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 engaged with a cover engaging groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is formed substantially at the center on the other side. Then, by inserting the pivot support pin 1251 of the cover 1250 into the cover support cylindrical portion 575, the cover 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to open and close freely, and the engagement piece 1252 is formed in the cover engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In addition, what is necessary is just to cancel | release engagement with the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785, in open | releasing.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the case shown, locking holes 1253 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protrudingly provided on the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is used. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, in the same manner as the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment described below, the connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are formed. It is done. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It plays the same function. Then, with the cover 1250 closed, the lock hole 1253 of the cover 1250 and the lock hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fixed with a screw (not shown). The rear opening 580 can be closed fixed. Then, since the locking protruding hook piece 570 penetrates the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed to the main body frame 3, for example, the locking hooking protruding hook piece 570 By locking the cover body 1250, only the person in charge having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250.

[1-6A. Other embodiment of cover body]
The cover 1250 (hereinafter referred to as "the cover 1250 according to the first embodiment") shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 74 described above is attached to the lower surface of the back of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. The main control board box 624 is formed so as to cover the back of the game board 4, but it may be a cover that covers the entire back of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter, referred to as “the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 150. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover according to the second embodiment is attached and viewed from the back with the cover opened, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the cover according to the second embodiment. 141 is a side view of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 141 is a pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, viewed from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is a second embodiment. And FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, which is a perspective view seen from the pivoting side of the cover body. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body removed according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of a payout control board box which is in polymeric contact with the lower side portion of the cover body according to the second embodiment. Figure 146 shows the second FIG. 147 is a perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body according to the embodiment, FIG. 147 is a rear view for illustrating the function of the cylinder lock provided on the cover body according to the second embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. In FIG. 139 to FIG. 150, the same reference numerals are assigned to configurations that perform the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  The outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. The shape of the provided tray unit 300 is also slightly different. Furthermore, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also formed on the open end side of the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546, which will be described later, in a locking wall 569 having a locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b (see FIG. 144) The positions of the notches 221 of the third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 that constitute the rear side wall are different in that they are extended downward (see FIG. 140), and The configuration is also different only in that the contact lower step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIG. 139 and FIG. 144 is to be attached to the board substrate holder 623 attached to the lower surface of the back of the game board 4 similarly to the embodiment shown in FIG. In 139 and FIG. 144, illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

  Therefore, first, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 1300 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish-like shape in which the side wall of a slightly elongated rectangular shape rises (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion or the rectangular plate portion), A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) pivotal support pins 1301 are integrally formed on a side wall of one longitudinal side, which is inserted into and axially supported by the cover body support cylindrical portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3; An engagement piece 1302 engaged with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is integrally formed on a slightly upper side of the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. The pivotal support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are the main body of the cover body 1300 by inserting the pivotal support pin 1301 of the cover body 1300 into the cover body support cylindrical portion 575 in the same manner as the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the frame 3 in an openable / closable manner and locking the engagement piece 1302 in the cover body engagement groove 785. It is possible to protect the back of various parts including the main control board box 624 which And the point which the cover body 1300 which concerns on this 2nd embodiment differs from the cover body 1250 which concerns on 1st embodiment is not only simply provided so as to be opened and closed freely, and it can not be opened illegally in the closed state. In order to cover the cylinder lock 1309 and the back of the main control board box 624, the test terminal is connected to the RAM clear switch 624a exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the inspection device. In the state where the connection operation opening 1303 is provided at the positions corresponding to 624 b and 624 c and the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300 is closed, the surface of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 It is a contact point. Therefore, the characteristic configuration of the cover 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape in the upper part of the contact lower side wall 1306 on the lower side of the cover body 1300, and the size is as shown in FIG. A RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and a test terminal 624b, 624c to which an inspection device is connected are provided to face each other. Further, inside the connection operation opening 1303, an upright wall 1304 and an abutment projection 1305 that project in a closed state and abut on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 are provided. The standing wall 1304 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the abutting projection 1305 protrudes relatively low along the one opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. The standing wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624, as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149). Of the main control board box 624 so as to prevent an unauthorized action from being performed on the main control board box 624.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1306 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the delivery control substrate box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is abutted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 mounted on the frame substrate holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached. An abutting lower step surface 1181a is formed which is formed lower than the surface. Thus, as shown in FIG. 144, the delivery control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed on the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103. When mounted over the mounting area 1143, the dispensing control board box 1105 is accommodated in the mounting area 1143, and is fixed so as not to move in the lateral direction or in the vertical direction. For this reason, the contact lower step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is covered by the contact lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 can not be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101.

  Next, the configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an oval lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is opened on the lower side of the lower side of the cover body 1300. A threaded portion 1310 having a sectional elliptical shape of the cylinder lock 1309 is penetrated through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed from the inside to the penetrated screw portion 1310, whereby the cylinder lock 1309 is fixed to the lock hole 1308. In the cylinder lock 1309, a lock shaft 1311 protrudes from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is drilled in the lower portion of the oval locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end portion of the cylinder lock 1309 by penetrating the hole 1314 and fastening with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the locking piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting a key (held by a manager of a game arcade or the like) into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating it. There is. Further, at the lower part of the lock hole 1308, a guide projection 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided so as to protrude inward. Furthermore, a screwing hole 1307 is formed on the open side of the cover body 1300 at the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1302 for screwing.

  On the other hand, a locking hole 568, a locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the screw holes 1307, the locking pieces 1313 and the guide projections 1316 described above. This configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. Although the cover contact groove 567 is formed on the above-described pivoting side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 as described above, this cover contact groove Recess holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of the 567 (upper and lower sides of the cover passage engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 is extended in the direction of the longitudinal center line of the main body frame 3 below the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569 is provided. Locking holes 569a and guide holes 569b are opened at the top and bottom of the cover. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 penetrates, and the locking wall 569 around the front side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), while the guide projection 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b, the locking piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked. It will be in the state which penetrated hole 569a. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating it in that state, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 and the front side of the locking wall 569 Engage. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the locking of the cover body 1300 by the cylinder lock 1309 is the lower part of the cover body 1300, the screwing hole which is fitted in a closed state for fixing the upper part of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) into the fixing holes 1307 and the fixing holes 568. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder lock at the upper and lower sides.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in the closed state, and the rear end side is the rear end of the award ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, after the discharge port 730). When viewed from the side wall and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740, the same vertical plane is obtained. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower side of the back side and the shape is extremely refreshing, so the entire thickness is uniform when transporting the pachinko machine 1 Because it is easy to grasp, it is easy to carry out loading and superposition work, and when actually installed on the island stand of the game arcade, it protrudes from the back of the pachinko machine of the other party on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in a backward direction It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring and the like. In this respect, the same effect can be obtained as shown in FIG. 3 also in the pachinko machine 1 using the cover 1250 according to the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the closed state of the cover body 1300 is performed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is the first reason why the cover body 1300 corresponds to the first embodiment. Since the covered area is larger in the longitudinal direction than the cover 1250, if the closed state is held only at the center of the cover 1300, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat, so the upper and lower two places are closed. Was configured to hold the As the second reason, as described above, since the contact lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 is in contact with the upper side of the dispensing control board box 1105, the lower side of the cover 1300 can not be particularly opened. It is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower part of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper part of the cover body 1300 also has to be closed. Further, for the second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any lock device which can be unlocked only by a game arcade manager) may be used. It is desirable to use

  As mentioned above, although the cover body 1300 which concerns on 2nd embodiment has been demonstrated, when the cover body 1300 which concerns on this 2nd embodiment closes the cover body 1300 with respect to the main body frame 3, the lower side part of the cover body 1300 Since the lower contact side wall 1306, which is a contact lower side wall 1306, is in contact with the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the delivery control substrate box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the delivery control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 can not be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. And since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, the fraudulent action against the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 as well as the fraudulent action against the dispensing control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300 is prevented. be able to. Further, even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals for testing 624b and 624c are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624 a can be operated when the device is connected or the software or the like runs away and recovers. Then, since an upright wall 1304 and a contact protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that a gap does not occur between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624, By inserting a piano wire or the like, it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 in the closed state. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the top to the lower side of the back side, and the shape is extremely clean, and the entire thickness of the pachinko machine 1 is Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to carry out loading and stacking operations. Also, even when actually installed on the island stand of the game arcade, the back of the pachinko machine of the other party on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in a backward direction It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring etc. which protrude in the.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the front right, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the left front, and FIG. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board obliquely viewed from the left rear, and FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled into main component members and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As shown, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a frame-shaped front component 601 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which game balls are hit. The game panel 600 is disposed to close the game area 605 on the rear side of the front component 601, and the function display is disposed on the lower side of the front component 601 to the right of the out port 606 outside the game area 605. The unit 640, an attacker unit 2000 disposed on the upper side of the out port 606 substantially at the center in the horizontal direction in the gaming area 605 and supported on the front of the gaming panel 600, and along the outer periphery of the gaming area 605 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 A side decoration member 2100 arranged and supported on the front of the game panel 600 and slightly up from the vertical center in the game area 605 A gate member 2200 disposed on the left side and supported by the front of the game panel 600, a frame-shaped center character 2300 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600, and the rear side of the game panel 600 The rear unit 3000 attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, the game panel 600 and through the frame of the center role 2300 in the frame of the game player 600 is mounted so as to be visible from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image as a display A liquid crystal display device 1400 is mainly provided. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device attached to the game panel 600 will be described in detail.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
First, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the attacker unit 2000 will be described. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the respective devices mounted on the game panel disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed obliquely from the front. The attacker unit 2000 of this example is fixed to the front of the gaming panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600 e formed at the lower part in the left-right direction center of the gaming panel 600. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which gaming balls driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the first starting opening 2001 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, the second starting opening 2002 disposed below the first starting opening 2001, and the lower end of the second starting opening 2002 And a rectangular winning opening 2003 which extends in the lateral direction more than the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2002.

  The upper side of the first starting port 2001 is open, and game balls can be always received (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 has a pair of movable pieces 2005 which can be expanded by the start port solenoid 2015 (see FIG. 223) between the second start port 2002 and the first start port 2001. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2005 are arranged substantially vertically, the game ball can not be received to the second start aperture 2002 by the first start aperture 2001 and the pair of movable pieces 2005. When the pair of movable pieces 2005 is expanded in the left-right direction (the state shown in FIG. 158), the game ball can be received by the second start opening 2002. That is, the second start opening 2002 is a variable winning opening due to the pair of movable pieces 2005. The pair of movable pieces 2005 are opened and closed based on detection of passage of the game ball by a gate sensor 2202 of a gate member 2200 described later.

  The winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2006 which can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported, and in the substantially vertical state (the state shown in FIG. 158), the large winning opening 2003 is closed to make the game ball unacceptable, and the upper side is inclined forward When it is turned so as to open, the big winning opening 2003 is opened and it becomes possible to receive the game ball. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big winning opening 2003 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the drawing is made by accepting the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002 (start winning). In accordance with the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit"), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2016 (see FIG. 223).

[2-2. Side winning opening member]
The side winning opening member 2100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 157 and 159. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the side winning opening member as viewed obliquely from the front. The side winning opening member 2100 is inserted from the front with respect to an opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e in which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction in the game panel 600 Above, it is fixed to the front of the game panel 600, and includes four general winning openings 2101 arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 605. As shown in the figure, these four general winning openings 2101 are opened upward, and gaming balls can always be accepted (winning).

  Further, the side winning opening member 2100 is disposed at a position such that the left end is in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 605, and is provided with a shelf 2102 inclined at the top as it goes to the right. The shelf portion 2102 allows the game balls flowing down along the outer periphery of the game area 605 to be brought closer to the central side of the game area 605. It should be noted that the four general winning openings 2101 are disposed on the right side of the right end of the shelf portion 2102, and even if the gaming ball is brought closer to the center side of the gaming area 605 by the shelf portion 2102, the general winning opening 2101. There is a possibility to win a prize. In addition, a decoration portion 2103 is provided on the front side (player's side) of the side winning opening member 2100, and it becomes possible to perform light emission decoration by light from a light emitting substrate (not shown) disposed behind it. ing.

[2-3. Gate member]
As shown in FIG. 157, the gate member 2200 is inserted from the front to the opening 600e formed on the left side of the game panel 600 in the left side and slightly above the center in the vertical direction on the left side. , Fixed to the front of the game panel 600. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2201 having a width allowing only one game ball to pass, and the gate sensor 2202 disposed in the gate 2201 can detect the game ball having passed the gate 2201. It is supposed to be.

[2-4. Center feature]
Next, the configuration of the center product 2300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 157 and 160 to 167. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of a center character viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the center character disassembled into major members for each of the main members, and FIG. Fig. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the center unit of the object and seen obliquely from the front, and Fig. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the movable shelf unit of the center character from the front, and Fig. 164 is a movable shelf unit 165 is a perspective view of the rack drive unit of FIG. 165 obliquely viewed from the front, FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the lower right decoration unit of the center character disassembled and seen from the diagonal front, and FIG. FIG. 167 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the main part, and FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the right decoration unit of the center part, disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the center character 2300 is fixed to the front of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 605. The above-mentioned gate member 2200 is disposed between the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center character 2300 and the outer periphery of the game area 605. Here, the center character 2300 corresponds to the center frame of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the center product 2300 has a frame-shaped center unit 2310, a movable shelf unit 2330 disposed below the center unit 2310, and a lower right corner disposed at the lower right of the center unit 2310. A decoration unit 2360 and a right decoration unit 2370 disposed on the upper side of the decoration unit 2360 are provided. As shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the center unit 2310 includes a frame-shaped base plate 2311 made of a transparent resin member, and a plurality of decorative members 2321 disposed on the front surface of the base plate 2311. The base plate 2311 has a substantially annular shape, and in the lower portion, the game ball entered into the chance opening 2334a (see FIG. 163) formed in the movable shelf unit 2330 is played under the center character 2300. A chance outlet 2311 a for discharging to the region 605 is provided to penetrate in the front-rear direction. A pedestal 2311 b for mounting the lower right decoration unit 2360 is formed at the lower right of the base plate 2311 so as to project downward.

  The decorative member 2321 mounted on the front surface of the base plate 2311 includes a brick-shaped upper brick-type decoration 2312 disposed on the top of the base plate 2311, and an upper left decoration 2313 disposed on the upper left of the base plate 2311. , A brick-shaped left brick-shaped ornament 2314 disposed along the left inner peripheral surface of the base plate 2311, an R-shaped R-shaped ornament 2315 disposed below the upper left ornament 2313, and a "phone" A telephone type decoration 2316 imitating the shape, a telephone box type decoration 2317 disposed on the lower side of the telephone box type imitating the shape of the "telephone box", and a substantially arc-shaped base plate provided below the base plate 2311. The decorative member 2321 other than the left brick type decoration 2314 and the base plate lower decoration 2320 is provided so as to project more toward the player than the front surface of the game panel 600. That is, the game ball is configured not to enter the center unit 2310 from the outside of the center unit 2310. However, a warp path forming member 2318 having a warp path 2318a inside is provided on the back side of the telephone box type decoration 2317, and the game ball rolling on the game area 605 on the left side of the center character 2300 is taken in and the movable shelf It is possible to send to the upper rolling surface 2334 b (see FIG. 163) formed in the unit 2330. That is, the warp passage 2318a has a warp entrance to which game balls can enter, on the left side, the right end communicates with the ball guiding member 2319, and the game ball taken from the warp entrance is warped 2318a. And, it is fed to the upper rolling surface 2334 b through the ball guiding member 2319.

  By the way, since the warp passage 2318a is incorporated in a hidden state in the center unit 2310, even if the game ball is taken into the warp passage 2318a, it can not be noticed, and thus the warp passage 2318a is produced It may be difficult to draw attention as a part of Therefore, in this example, the warp passage forming member 2318 is formed of a transparent resin member, and a viewing window 2317a is provided on the front surface of the telephone box type decoration 2317, and the inside of the warp passage 2318a is viewed through the viewing window 2317a. It is possible to visually recognize whether or not the game ball has been introduced into the warp passage 2318a.

  However, even if the observation window 2317a is formed in this way, if the game ball is not taken into the warp passage 2318a at a low frequency, there is a possibility that the timing at which the game ball passes and the timing at which the game ball passes will coincide. Since the possibility that the game ball can be seen through the window 2317a is extremely reduced, there is a possibility that the interest to the viewing window 2317a may be impaired. In particular, when the size of the observation window 2317a is relatively small, the possibility of visualizing the gaming ball is further reduced, so that the user loses the willingness to peep in and dissatisfaction with the inability to visually recognize the gaming ball. It is a concern to cause it.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to arrange the viewing window 2317a in front of the movable character body 3192 (see FIG. 192) described later, and to show the movable character 3192 in the standby position through the viewing window 2317a. That is, by showing the movable character body 3192 hidden behind the game panel 600 or the center unit 2310 as the background of the warp passage 2318a, the motivation to look inside through the viewing window 2317a is heightened, and Even if you can not see it, you can reduce the dissatisfaction with it.

  Next, the movable shelf unit 2330 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 161 and 163, the movable shelf unit 2330 is for rolling the gaming ball taken into the center unit 2310 in the left and right direction, and in particular, a part of the rolling surface in the left and right direction Reciprocating movement makes it possible to change the passage of the game ball. To explain in detail, the movable shelf unit 2330 includes a cheese type shelf 2331 having a shape imitating "cheese", a star-shaped lens 2332 disposed on the upper left side of the cheese type shelf 2331, and a cheese type shelf 2331 And a light emitting substrate 2333 which emits light from the lower side. In addition, on the front side of the cheese type shelf 2331, the rear shelf 2334 having the chance opening 2334a and the upper rolling surface 2334b described above, and the movable on the front side of the chance opening 2334a A shelf portion 2339 and a shelf drive unit 2340 disposed below the rear shelf 2334 and reciprocating the movable shelf portion 2339 in the left-right direction are provided.

  The upper rolling surface 2334b of the rear shelf 2334 is formed in a wave shape, and the left end is in communication with the ball guiding member 2319 described above, and the gaming ball sent through the warp passage 2318a and the ball guiding member 2319 is in the left-right direction It is possible to roll. In particular, the upper rolling surface 2334b is raised in a mountain shape at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction, and a top portion thereof is provided with a first outflow portion 2344c formed to have a downward slope toward the front. A second outflow portion 2344d formed in a downward slope toward the front inside is provided in the valley portion of the second. That is, when the momentum of the game ball rolling in the left and right direction disappears in the center portion (the top portion) in the left and right direction, the game ball is flowed forward from the center first outflow portion 2344c, On the other hand, when there is no force in a portion other than the central portion, the flow is made to flow forward and inward from the second outflow portion 2344 d.

  As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the movable shelf portion 2339 has a substantially arc-shaped chance guiding portion 2339a formed in the central portion in the left-right direction and a flat shape formed on the left and right outsides of the chance guiding portion 2339a. A rolling portion 2339b is provided, and the chance guiding portion 2339a and the rolling portion 2339b are partitioned by the protruding portion 2339c. The chance guidance unit 2339a corresponds to the chance opening 2334a of the rear shelf 2334, and the game ball sent to the chance guidance unit 2339a enters the chance opening 2334a, and the chance exit of the table plate 2311 (see FIG. 162) It is discharged from the game area 605 directly above the first start opening 2001 from the position 2311 a. A ball receiving portion 2341 is disposed on the rear side of the chance opening 2334a, and the gaming ball entered into the chance opening 2334a is guided toward the lower portion of the base plate 2311. On the other hand, the left and right rolling portions 2339b of the movable shelf portion 2339 are not in communication with the chance opening 2334a, and are configured to guide the gaming balls toward the lower rolling surface 2335a of the front shelf 2335. The movable shelf portion 2339 reciprocates in the left-right direction to change the relative position with respect to the rear shelf 2334, and the timing of the gaming balls flowing out from the second outflow portion 2344d of the rear shelf 2334 Based on the position of the movable shelf 2339 at that time, when the game ball is sent to the chance guidance unit 2339a (ie, when the advantage is high) and when it is sent to the rolling unit 2339b (ie, when (If the advantage is low). The gaming balls having flowed out from the first outflow portion 2344c at the center of the rear shelf 2334 are always sent to the chance guiding portion 2339a regardless of the position of the movable shelf portion 2339.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the rack drive unit 2340 includes a motor stand 2342 erected, a drive motor 2343 fixed to the rear surface of the motor stand 2342, and a motor cam 2344 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 2343. The first link 2345 and the second link 2346 which are connected to the motor cam 2344 and converts the rotational movement of the motor cam 2344 to reciprocating linear motion in the left and right direction, and a pair of pins 2347 which connect the rear surface of the movable shelf 2339 and the second link 2346 And is configured. The pin 2347 is disposed through a pair of long holes 2334e penetrating in the front-rear direction of the rear shelf 2334 (see FIG. 163), and the movable direction is guided in the left-right direction by the long holes 2334e. There is. In addition, a photo sensor 2349 (see FIG. 163) for detecting the position of the movable shelf 2339 is provided on the front surface of the motor stand 2342.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 163, a front shelf 2335 having a lower rolling surface 2335a is disposed on the front side of the movable shelf 2339, and on the lower side thereof, toward the movable shelf 2339 and the front shelf 2335 A light emitting substrate 2338 which emits light is provided. Further, at the boundary between the cheese type shelf 2331 and the rear shelf 2334, a shelf shield 2336 serving as a rear wall of the upper rolling surface 2334b and a fork type of a shape disposed on the upper right side and imitating a "fork" An ornament 2337 is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 161 and 165, the lower right decoration unit 2360 is disposed on the front surface of the pedestal portion 2311b of the base plate 2311 except for the light emitting substrate 2362 described later, and has an arc-shaped decoration base as a decoration member. 2361, a first explosion-type lens 2363 disposed at the central portion in the vertical direction of the decoration base 2361, and a second explosion-type lens 2369 disposed at the lower front of the pedestal 2311b. The second explosion-type lens 2369 is composed of a lens frame 2365, an explosion-type light transmitting portion 2366 inside the lens frame 2365, and a TRAP-type light transmitting portion 2367 that simulates the character "TRAP". In addition, on the rear side of the first explosion type lens 2363 and the second explosion type lens 2369, light emitting substrates 2364 and 2368 for irradiating light to the respective decoration members are disposed, and on the rear side of the decoration base 2361 The light emitting substrate 2362 is disposed on the rear surface of the pedestal portion 2311 b and emits light to the decorative base 2361 through the window portion 2311 c formed in the pedestal portion 2311 b. All of these light emitting substrates 2362, 2364, and 2368 It is possible to make the decorative member of the light emitting decoration.

  Further, the decoration base 2361 is provided with a plate-like projecting piece 2361a that protrudes obliquely downward to the right from the base plate 2311, while the explosive type light transmitting portion 2366 has a projecting portion 2366a facing the projecting piece 2361a It is formed, and as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166, a passage S through which the game ball K can pass is formed between the projecting piece 2361a and the projecting portion 2366a. In particular, the first protrusion 2361b and the second protrusion 2361c protruding toward the passage S are formed on the projecting piece 2361a of the decoration base 2361, and the game ball K passing through the passage S is exposed to the explosive light By causing it to flow down while colliding with the protruding portion 2366 a of the unit 2366, the speed of the gaming ball sent to the out port 606 is suppressed. In detail, since the obstacle nails and the like are not provided in the right play area 605 of the center character 2300, the game balls driven into the right play area 605 head to the out port 606 while having large kinetic energy. In this case, it is possible to reduce the momentum of the game ball K and make it easy to enter the out port 606 by causing the passing game ball K to collide with the projection 2366a as in this example. . In addition, although there is a high possibility that the game ball K collides with the corner of the projecting portion 2366a, damage due to the collision is suppressed by forming a chamfer on this portion. In addition, the second protrusion 2361c on the downstream side has a lower height than the first protrusion 2361b, and the second protrusion 2361c can rectify the behavior of the gaming ball K rolling in a zigzag manner. It is possible.

  As shown in FIGS. 161 and 167, the right decoration unit 2370 is disposed on the front surface of the base plate 2311 located on the upper side of the lower right decoration unit 2360, and has a right foot type decoration 2371 which simulates the right foot, A right foot unit 2374 consisting of an explosive type mark 2372 disposed at the center thereof, a light emitting substrate 2373 for emitting light on the rear side of the right foot unit 2374 to illuminate the right foot unit 2374 and an upper side of the right foot unit 2374 GYA type lens 2375 having the characters “GYA”, GYA type lens 2375 and lens sheet 2376 are accommodated on the front side, frame 2377 for accommodating frame lens 2378 on the rear side, frame lens 2378 and lens sheet 2376 through GYA type lens A light emitting substrate 2379 for emitting light to 2375; It is configured Te. A frame for guiding light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2379 to the character back member 2380 and the character back member 2380 and the character left foot member 2382 provided as part of the first character described later on the upper right of the frame 2377 , And an upper right decoration 2383 disposed on the upper right of the character left foot member 2382. Further, a center upper right driving substrate 2384 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2311 located on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 2379 so as to be covered by a substrate cover 2385.

[2-5. Back unit]
Next, the configuration of back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the back unit obliquely viewed from the front, FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board showing the effect state by the first character combination unit, and FIG. 170 is the first character combination unit FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the first character combination unit and is an oblique front view thereof. FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the left arm unit of the first character combination unit. And FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the right arm unit of the first character combination unit, and FIG. 174 is a perspective view of the first character combination unit. FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the arm drive unit as seen obliquely from the rear, and FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the face slide unit of the first character combination unit as seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. Fig. 177 is an exploded perspective view of the face slide mechanism and the face moving unit, and Fig. 177 is an exploded perspective view of the face slide mechanism, and Fig. 178 is a face slide. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the drive unit of the mechanism unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the drive unit as viewed obliquely from the rear, and FIG. 180 is an oblique view of the face moving unit and the face unit FIG. 181 is a perspective view of a face moving unit disassembled into a mouth mechanism unit and a face base portion and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 182 is a perspective view of the mouth mechanism unit viewed from an oblique rear FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the mouth mechanism unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the face base portion disassembled and viewed from the diagonal front, and FIG. 185 is a perspective view It is the perspective view which made the face type unit of the 1st character role unit transparent, and was seen from slanting front

  Also, FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board showing the state of effect by the signboard type character unit, FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the signboard type character unit seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 188 is a signboard type FIG. 189 is a perspective view of the accessory unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 189 is a perspective view of the billboard movable unit of the billboard type accessory unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 190 is a front view of the game board showing a state of effect by the second character combination unit, FIG. 191 is a perspective view of the second character combination unit seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 192 is FIG. 193 is a perspective view of the character unit of the second character combination unit viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 193 is a perspective view of the character unit disassembled and viewed from the oblique front, and FIG. 194 is an oblique view of the disassembled one FIG. 195 (a) is a perspective view of the mechanical part of the character unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 195 (b) is a front view of a state in which the cover member is removed. FIG. 197 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the mechanical part of the character unit, FIG. 197 is a perspective view of the door unit of the second character role unit seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 198 is an oblique rear of the door unit FIG. 199 is an enlarged front view in the vicinity of a viewing window on the game board, and FIG. 199 is a perspective view of the character unit and members disposed on the rear side, viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the character unit and the member disposed on the rear side, which are disassembled and viewed obliquely from the rear.

  FIG. 202 is a front view of the game board showing the state of effect by the boat-shaped character unit, FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the boat-shaped character unit seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 204 is a boat-shaped FIG. 205 is a front view showing a state where the bowl-shaped decorative body in the bowl-shaped character unit is at an initial position, and FIG. 206 is a bowl-shaped view. FIG. 207 is a front view showing a state in which the decorative body has moved to the intermediate position, and FIG. 207 is a front view showing a state in which the vertical decorative body has moved to the end position.

  Also, FIG. 208 is a front view of the game board showing the state of effect by the combination product unit, FIG. 209 is a perspective view of the combination product unit seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 210 is a combination product unit FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the combination product unit with the cover member removed and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 212 is an exploded perspective view of the combination product unit from the front FIG. 213 is a perspective view as seen, and FIG. 213 is a perspective view showing an operating state of the combination product unit.

  Further, FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the trap type product unit seen obliquely from the front, FIG. 215 is a perspective view showing the operation state of the trap type product unit, and FIG. FIG. 217 is a perspective view of the ball guiding passage and the star light emitting light guide plate obliquely viewed from the front, and FIG. 218 is a perspective view of the ball guiding passage and the star light emitting light guide plate. FIG. 219 is a longitudinal sectional view, and FIG. 219 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal display device and a surrounding decoration part as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. FIG. 221 is a perspective view of it disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 168, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 600 by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001 and in the back box 3001, a first character combination unit 3010 disposed on the front upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a signboard combination combination disposed on the left side of the first character combination unit 3010 Object unit 3150, a second character combination product unit 3180 disposed on the front left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a box-shaped combination product unit 3240 disposed on the front right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 Combination unit 3270 disposed on the front lower side of the main unit and a trap type combination unit 331 disposed on the lower right side of the back box 3001 And a ball guiding passage 3340 and a star light emitting light guide plate 3341 disposed in the lower portion on the left side of the back box 3001 and a starting opening guiding passage 3347 disposed on the left side of the trap type character article unit 3310 ing.

  As shown in FIG. 168, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape having an open front side, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 3001 a projecting outward at the front end, and the fixing portions 3001 a Is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600. Further, in the back box 3001, a rectangular opening 3001c is formed substantially at the center of the back wall 3001b, and it is possible to visually recognize the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side through the opening 3001c. . Furthermore, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the first character combination unit 3010, the second character combination unit 3180, and the respective substrates, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

  The first character role unit 3010 will be described in detail. The first character combination unit 3010 is a movable combination disposed on the front upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and when it is moved (dropped) to the effect position, as shown in FIG. 169, the liquid crystal display device 1400. Of the liquid crystal display 1400 and is sized to shield about 1/3 of the upper right of the liquid crystal display 1400. As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the first character accessory unit 3010 is configured to include an arm drive unit 3020 and a face slide unit 3060. The arm drive unit 3020 moves left and right arms of a first character (hereinafter referred to as "cat character") that images a cat, and includes a left arm unit 3021, a right arm unit 3030, and a drive unit 3040. ing. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the left arm unit 3021 is shaped to imitate the left arm of the “cat character”, and is disposed at the top end of the left arm 3022 which is vertically long and the tip of the left arm 3022 A left hand portion 3023 and a light emitting substrate 3024 which emits light from the rear side toward the left arm portion 3022 and the left hand portion 3023 and emits and decorates them are configured. Further, an L-shaped mounting portion 3022a which is bent backward and extended upward is formed on the upper portion of the left arm portion 3022, and a left arm base 3025 is attached to the rear surface thereof. . A shaft support 3025a is formed in the upper part of the left arm base 3025. The shaft support 3025a is inserted into the through hole 3022b of the attachment 3022a from the rear, and the lower right of the left arm base 3025 is a cylindrical fitting cylinder 3025b projecting in the front and rear direction. Is formed. The arm shaft portion 3026 is inserted into the center of the shaft support portion 3025a, and the guide pin 3027 is inserted into the fitting cylindrical portion 3025b via the left bush 3053.

  As shown in FIGS. 171 and 173, the right arm unit 3030 is shaped to imitate the right arm of the “cat character”, and is disposed at the right end of the right arm 3031 long in the left and right, and the tip of the right arm 3031. It comprises a right hand portion 3032 and a light emitting substrate 3033 which emits light from the rear side toward the right arm portion 3031 and the right hand portion 3032 to emit light and decorate them. A star-shaped opening 3032a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the center of the right hand portion 3032, and a star-shaped frame 3034 and a star-shaped lens 3035 are fitted into the opening 3032a from the rear side. . Further, a substantially rectangular attachment portion 3031 a is formed extending at the right side of the right arm portion 3031, and a right arm base 3036 is assembled on the rear surface. A shaft support 3036 a is formed at the right end of the right arm base 3036, and a cylindrical fitting cylinder 3036 b that protrudes in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper left of the right arm base 3036. The arm shaft portion 3037 is inserted into the center of the shaft support portion 3036a, and the guide pin 3038 is inserted into the fitting cylindrical portion 3036b via the right bush 3054.

  As shown in FIGS. 171 and 174, the drive unit 3040 swings the left arm unit 3021 and the right arm unit 3030 so that the "cat character" swings an arm, and has a thin box shape whose rear surface is open. The gear box base 3041, a gear box lid (not shown) for closing the rear surface of the gear box base 3041, an arm drive motor 3043 disposed on the front upper right of the gear box base 3041, and the gear box base 3041 And a mechanical unit 3039 for transferring the power of the arm drive motor 3043 to move the left arm unit 3021 and the right arm unit 3030. The mechanism unit 3039 includes a motor gear 3044 connected to the arm drive motor 3043, a first intermediate gear 3046 rotatably supported by the gear pin 3045, and a large gear 3046 a on the outer periphery being engaged with the motor gear 3044, and a first intermediate gear A fan-shaped left drive gear 3047 engaged with a small gear (not shown) formed on 3046 is included. The rotation center 3047a of the left drive gear 3047 is connected to the pivot 3025a of the left arm unit 3021 via the arm shaft 3026 (see FIG. 172), and the rotation of the left drive gear 3047 is transmitted to the left arm unit 3021. It is supposed to be. An arc-shaped guide groove 3041a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower right end of the gear box base 3041. By inserting the guide pin 3027 (see FIG. 172), the left arm unit 3021 is made smooth. While rotating, the movable range of the left arm unit 3021 is mechanically limited.

  Further, the mechanism unit 3039 is rotatably supported by a gear pin 3048 and is engaged with a second intermediate gear 3049 engaged with a small gear (not shown) of the first intermediate gear 3046 and with the second intermediate gear 3049 The fan-shaped right drive gear 3050 is included. The rotation center 3050a of the right drive gear 3050 is connected to the pivot 3030a of the right arm unit 3030 via the arm shaft 3037 (see FIG. 173), and the rotation of the right drive gear 3050 is transmitted to the right arm unit 3030. It is supposed to be. An arc-shaped guide groove 3041b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the left end of the gear box base 3041, and the guide pin 3038 (see FIG. 173) is inserted to smoothly rotate the right arm unit 3030. While moving, the movable range of the right arm unit 3030 is mechanically limited. Further, a torsion spring 3051 is provided in the right drive gear 3050, and the right arm unit 3030 is biased toward the upper stop position. Further, a plurality of photosensors 3052 are disposed in the gear box base 3041 so that the movable positions of the left arm unit 3021 and the right arm unit 3030 can be detected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 175, the face slide unit 3060 is composed of a face unit 3061, a face slide mechanism 3070, and a face moving unit 3100. The face unit 3061 is shaped to imitate the face of the "cat character" which is a three-dimensional character, and is hollowed by a material having flexibility and light transmission, specifically, soft polyvinyl chloride. A face portion 3062 formed on the surface of the disc and four eyelids 3063 attached to the face portion 3062. In addition, an opening (not shown) is formed on the rear side of the face portion 3062, and the face moving portion 3100 is mounted so as to be covered from the front.

  The face slide mechanism unit 3070 is configured to raise and lower the face moving unit 3100 obliquely in the vertical direction. As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the face slide mechanism portion 3070 is disposed on the unit base 3071, a shaft base sheet metal 3072 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 3071, and a shaft base sheet 3072 on the rear side. A sheet metal retainer 3073 is provided as a base member. The shaft base sheet metal 3072 is supported by being sandwiched by the unit base 3071 and the sheet metal holder 3073, and a shaft lower support piece 3072a extending forward from the lower end, a shaft upper support piece 3072b extending forward from the upper end, And, a motor support piece 3072 c which is extended to the front from the upper end right end is attached so as to project to the front more than the front surface of the unit base 3071.

  In addition, the face slide mechanism unit 3070 includes a slide moving unit 3075 disposed on the front side of the unit base 3071. As shown in FIG. 178, the slide moving unit 3075 includes a slide base 3076 slidably supported in the vertical direction, and a relay substrate 3077 mounted on the rear surface of the slide base 3076 (see FIG. 178 (not shown in FIG. 178)). And a pressing member 3078 for supporting the relay substrate 3077 from the rear side. The slide base 3076 has a base 3076 b having a substantially rectangular front view shape and an opening 3076 a at the center, a box-shaped left support 3076 c formed at the left end of the base 3076 b, and a box formed at the right end of the base 3076 b And a right support 3076d. The slide moving unit 3075 is connected to the face moving unit 3100 (see FIG. 176) via a screwing member 3092 and a bearing presser 3097 described later, and moves the slide moving unit 3075 together with the face moving unit 3100 It has become. In addition, the unit capable of moving up and down, which includes the face unit 3061 (see FIG. 170), the face moving unit 3100, and the slide moving unit 3075, will be described as a movable unit 3079.

  By the way, since the movable unit 3079 is relatively large and has many mechanisms, the weight is greatly increased, and it is difficult to move the movable unit 3079 up and down with a small drive motor. When a large drive motor is used, the movable unit 3079 can be moved up and down, but this increases the size of the drive motor and makes it difficult to arrange in a limited space. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 179, the constant load spring 3081 is disposed on the rear side of the moving unit 3075, and movable via the constant load spring 3081 assembled to the unit base 3071 (see FIG. 177). The unit 3079 is supported in a suspended state. The constant load spring 3081 is referred to as a Conston (trade name) spring, and comprises a small spring drum 3082 and a long flat spring portion 3083 closely wound around the spring drum 3082 with a constant curvature. Is attached to the unit base 3071, and the tip end portion of the plate spring portion 3083 is connected to the rear surface of the slide base 3076. The constant force spring 3081 has a substantially constant return force (load) generated when the leaf spring portion 3083 is stretched linearly regardless of the stroke, and the movable unit 3079 has a dead weight as the return force of the constant force spring 3081. And is supported in a balanced state. For this reason, the weight of the movable unit 3079 is theoretically zero, and can be raised and lowered by the small output drive motor 3088. The constant load spring 3081 is connected to a substantially central position in the lateral direction of the movable unit 3079, and the movable unit 3079 is suspended in a state in which the left and right are balanced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the drive unit 3085 for moving the movable unit 3079 up and down includes a drive motor 3088 attached to the motor support piece 3072c of the shaft base sheet metal 3072 (see FIG. 177) and a drive motor 3088 A motor gear 3089 connected to the rotating shaft, a shaft gear 3090 engaged with the motor gear 3089, and a rotating shaft 3091 connected to the shaft gear 3090 and having a helical feed screw 3091a formed on its circumferential surface, and the feed screw 3091a And a screwing member 3092 fixed to the right support portion 3076d of the slide base 3076. The rotating shaft 3091 is rotatably supported by a shaft lower support piece 3072a of the shaft base sheet metal 3072 and a motor support piece 3072c. A groove (not shown) which is U-shaped in plan view is vertically penetrated and formed in the right support 3076d, and the rotary shaft 3091 is inserted from the front into the groove and the front surface is a screwing member It is closed by 3092. The screwing member 3092 is formed on the inner surface with a protrusion (not shown) engaged with the feed screw 3091a of the rotating shaft 3091 and fixed to the front surface of the right support portion 3076d by rotation of the rotating shaft 3091 The generated thrust is transmitted to the slide base 3076. As described above, since the movable unit 3079 is moved up and down using the rotary shaft 3091 having the feed screw 3091a formed thereon, the load on the drive motor 3088 is further reduced. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 177, the drive motor 3088 is enclosed and accommodated by the motor cover 3086 and the cover lid 3087.

  Further, since the screwing member 3092 is connected to the right end of the slide base 3076, the screwing member 3092 can be disposed without interfering with the plate spring portion 3083 of the constant load spring 3081. Further, by arranging the drive portion 3085 close to one end side of the slide base 3076, a relatively large space can be provided on the rear side of the slide base 3076. For example, other members are arranged close to the slide base 3076 It is also possible.

  In the case where the flat spring portion 3083 of the constant load spring 3081 is connected to the approximate center of the slide base 3076 in the lateral direction and the screwing member 3092 is connected to one end side of the slide base 3076 as described above, the connection of the spring drum 3082 Since the distance from the point to the connection point of the screwing member 3092 is increased, the moment to move the movable unit 3079 around the connection point of the constant load spring 3081 is increased when moving the movable unit 3079 up and down.

  On the other hand, in the present example, the left end of the slide base 3076 is slidably supported, and the horizontal state is achieved even when power is applied to the right end of the slide base 3076 when moving the movable unit 3079 up and down. Of the movable unit 3079 can be smoothly raised and lowered. Specifically, the left supporting portion 3076c of the slide base 3076 is formed such that a groove whose plan view is U-shaped penetrates in the vertical direction, and a slide collar (not shown) is accommodated in the groove, A slide shaft 3095 whose axial direction is the vertical direction is inserted into the slide collar. The slide shaft 3095 is supported by the shaft lower support piece 3072 a and the shaft upper support piece 3072 b of the shaft base sheet metal 3072.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the face moving unit 3100 is composed of a front opening mechanism unit 3110 and a rear face base unit 3140. As shown in FIGS. 181 and 184, the face base portion 3140 includes a rear support member 3141 that supports the rear side of the face portion 3062 in the face unit 3061 (see FIG. 180) from the inside. The rear side support member 3141 is made of a resin member, has a substantially semicircular shape in a front view, and has a plurality of concavo-convex portions on the front surface. Further, the rear side support member 3141 is plated on the entire surface, and even when the soft polyvinyl chloride face portion 3062 comes in contact with it, it is possible to prevent the erosion of the resin by the plasticizer. Two light emitting substrates 3143 are disposed on the front surface of the rear side support member 3141, particularly, in the substantially right half region via the rear side insulation member 3142, and the inner surface of the face portion 3062 from the rear side of the face portion 3062. By emitting light, it is possible to emit light and decorate the face portion 3062. Further, the rear side insulating member 3142 is a non-conductive resin member, and by attaching the light emitting substrate 3143 via the rear side insulating member 3142, the light emitting substrate 3143 can be insulated from the plating. It is possible to prevent the damage and malfunction of the

  The mouth mechanism unit 3110 is provided with a front support member 3111 made of resin, which supports the front side of the face portion 3062 from the inside, as shown in FIGS. A light reflecting surface 3111 a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the front side support member 3111 so as to reflect the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3143 (see FIG. 184) of the face base portion 3140. This will be described in detail. In the case where the front side support member 3111 is provided in front of the light emitting substrate 3143, the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3143 may be blocked by the front side supporting member 3111 and light may not be easily irradiated to the front side of the face portion 3062. Further, as a result, the brightness of the surface of the face portion 3062 may be uneven, or the outline of the front side support member 3111 may be projected as a shadow picture.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side support member 3111 is formed smaller than the rear side support member 3141, and the light reflection surface 3111 a is formed on at least the outer peripheral edge of the front side support member 3111. Thus, light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3143 can be applied to the light reflecting surface 3111 a to light the outer peripheral edge of the front side support member 3111. In particular, since the light reflecting surface 3111 a is formed by plating, the light reflecting surface 3111 a is finished to be smooth and no unevenness appears on the surface of the face portion 3062. Further, by performing plating on the outer peripheral edge of the front side support member 3111, it is possible to prevent the erosion of the resin by the plasticizer, even if it is in direct contact with the inner surface of the face portion 3062.

  In addition, the light emitting substrate 3113 is mounted on the front surface of the front side support member 3111 via the front side insulating member 3112. According to this, light is irradiated to the front surface portion of the face portion 3062 by the light emitting substrate 3113, and the entire face portion 3062 can be illuminated. Particularly, as shown in FIG. 185, the front side support member 3111 is disposed to be inclined in the front-rear direction such that the distance from the rear side support member 3141 is wider at the right end than at the left end. The light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3143 disposed on the front surface of the side support member 3141 is easily emitted from the right side, and the ratio of irradiating the right side surface of the face portion 3062 is increased. On the other hand, since the front side support member 3111 is disposed to be inclined in the front-rear direction, the ratio of the light radiated from the light emitting substrate 3113 mounted on the front surface to the left surface of the face portion 3062 increases. Therefore, the two light emitting substrates 3143 and 3113 enable the entire face portion 3062 to be efficiently and uniformly illuminated. In addition, since the light emitting substrate 3143 is not provided in the left region of the front surface of the rear support member 3141 where the distance is narrow, unnecessary light emission is suppressed in the portion where the irradiation efficiency to the face portion 3062 is low. It is possible to reduce energy consumption. Further, a deformation operation mechanism (described later) for deforming the mouth of the face portion 3062 is disposed in front of the left area, but the light emitting substrate 3143 is not disposed behind the deformation operation mechanism. The contour of the operating mechanism is not projected. The front insulating member 3112 is a non-conductive resin member like the rear insulating member 3142. By attaching the light emitting substrate 3113 via the front insulating member 3112, the light emitting substrate 3113 is insulated from the plating. It is possible to prevent the light emitting substrate 3113 from being damaged or malfunctioning. In addition, on the front side of the light emitting substrate 3113, an eye type reflector 3114 for guiding a part of light (for example, light of different colors) emitted from the light emitting substrate 3113 to a portion corresponding to the eyes of the face portion 3062 is disposed. It is set up.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 183, a gate-shaped port mechanism base sheet metal 3116 is attached to the rear surface of the front side insulating member 3112 via the board attachment sheet metal 3115, and the deformation operation mechanism is attached to the port mechanism base sheet metal 3116. The upper jaw sheet metal 3119 and the first link sheet metal 3117 connected to the lower jaw sheet metal 3121 are rotatably supported. The upper jaw sheet metal 3119 and the lower jaw sheet metal 3121 are disposed at the mouth of the face portion 3062, and can be opened and closed at the mouth of the face portion 3062 by rotating in opposite directions. The lower jaw sheet metal 3121 is pivotally supported by the tip end portion of the first link sheet metal 3117 via the link shaft 3122, and an extension 3121 extended rearward from the left side is supported by the port mechanism base sheet metal 3116. The first link sheet metal 3117 is an L-shaped member in a side view, and is pivotally supported by the first hole 3116 a in the lower part of the port mechanism base sheet metal 3116 via the spacer 3123 and provided at the upper end portion Both ends of the link shaft 3129 a are inserted into an arc-shaped guide groove 3116 c formed on the upper side surface of the mouth mechanism base sheet metal 3116. On the other hand, the upper jaw sheet metal 3119 is pivotally supported by the second hole 3116b at the lower end of the mouth mechanism base sheet metal 3116 via the link shaft 3119a, and the link shaft 3120 provided at the rear end portion is the second link sheet metal 3118 Connected to the tip of the The rear end portion of the second link sheet metal 3118 is pivotally supported by a link shaft 3129 a provided at the upper end of the first link sheet metal 3117. Further, the link 3129b is slidably inserted in the lateral direction in the link shaft 3129a, and the link pin 3130 whose axial direction is in the vertical direction is inserted in the link 3129b from above. The link pin 3130 is connected at an eccentric position with respect to a motor link 3128 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3127.

  According to this, when the drive motor 3127 operates and the motor link 3128 rotates, the link pin 3130 and the link 3129 b turn around the rotation axis of the drive motor 3127. Since the link 3129b is supported slidably in the lateral direction with respect to the link shaft 3129a, the link shaft 3129a is displaced with respect to the component in the front-rear direction of the link 3129b, and the second link sheet metal 3118 and the first link sheet metal I can move the 3117. Then, the lower jaw sheet metal 3121 is displaced with the movement of the first link sheet metal 3117, the upper jaw sheet metal 3119 is displaced with the movement of the second link sheet metal 3118, and the lower jaw sheet metal 3121 and the upper jaw sheet metal 3119 move in opposite directions. It becomes. Thus, each time the drive motor 3127 is rotated one turn, the lower jaw plate 3121 and the upper jaw plate 3119 make one reciprocation, and it is possible to move the mouth portion of the face 3062 as if the character were speaking. The positions of the lower jaw 3121 and the upper jaw 3119 are detected by the photo sensor 3131. In addition, a light emitting substrate 3124 is attached to the upper jaw sheet metal 3119 through the substrate base 3125, and it is possible to light the mouth portion (inside the mouth) of the face portion 3062.

  Next, the sign type character product unit 3150 will be described in detail. The billboard type character product unit 3150 is a movable character disposed on the front upper left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and when moved to the effect position, as shown in FIG. 186, from the front upper left of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is inclined to the lower right. As shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 188, the signboard type character unit 3150 includes a signboard movable portion 3151 having a shape of a signboard, and a signboard case 3161 and a case lid 3162 rotatably supporting the signboard movable portion 3151; A drive unit 3165 for rotating the signboard main body 3152 within a predetermined range, two photosensors 3173 for detecting the turning position of the signboard movable section 3151, and a brick type decoration covering the right side of the signboard case 3161 and the case cover 3162 And a unit 3174.

  As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the movable sign portion 3151 has a box-like sign body main body 3152 having a window portion 3052a in front of a predetermined character (TOM · JERRY) on the front surface, and the window portion 3052a from the rear side A logo lens 3153 is inserted, and a light emitting substrate 3154 for emitting light and illuminating the signboard main body 3152 from the back side of the logo lens 3153 is provided. In addition, a cheese type decorative body 3156 having a shape imitating cheese is attached to the front lower right portion of the sign body 3152, and a photo shield plate 3160 having a detection piece 3160 a for the photo sensor 3173 is mounted on the front left side of the sign body 315. It is attached. In addition, reflectors 3155 and 3157 for guiding light (for example, light of a color different from another) emitted from a part of the light emitting substrate 3154 to a predetermined portion of the logo lens 3153 between the light emitting substrate 3154 and the logo lens 3153 Is provided. The cheese type decoration 3156 attached to the front of the sign body 3152 is attached to the light emitting substrate 3154 via a screw (not shown), whereby the logo lens 3153 and the reflectors 3155 and 3157 are attached to the sign body 3152 It is supported in a state of being held between the light emitting substrate 3154 and the light emitting substrate 3154. A substrate cover 3158 is disposed on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 3154.

  The sign case 3161 has a space capable of accommodating the drive portion 3165 (other than the drive motor 3166) and the photo sensor 3173 on the front side, and a bearing portion 3161a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed on the lower right side. The shaft 3159 connected to the left side of the sign body 3152 is inserted into the bearing portion 3161a, and the signboard movable portion 3151 is rotatably supported centering on the bearing portion 3161a. The case lid 3162 is mounted on the front side of the sign case 3161, and shields the drive unit 3165, the photo sensor 3173, and the like accommodated in the sign case 3161.

  The drive unit 3165 includes a drive motor 3166 disposed on the rear surface of the sign case 3161, a motor gear (not shown) disposed on the front side of the sign case 3161 and connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3166, and A first gear 3169 is disposed between the rear surface and the cover 3168 and has a large gear 3169a meshed with the motor gear on its outer periphery, and a small gear (not shown) formed inside the first gear 3169 A second gear 3170 and a fan-shaped third gear 3171 engaged with the second gear 3170 and having a shaft 3159 inserted through a bush 3172 at the center are provided. According to this, when the drive motor 3166 is operated, rotational motion is transmitted to the shaft 3159 via the motor gear, the first gear 3169, the second gear 3170, and the third gear 3171, and the signboard movable portion 3151 is the shaft 3159 It is designed to rotate around the The motor gear is covered from the front side by a gear cover 3167. In addition, the brick-type decorative portion 3174 is attached by a screw (not shown) to a screw hole forming cylindrical portion 3161b that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the right end of the sign case 3161.

  Next, the second character role unit 3180 will be described in detail. The second character combination unit 3180 is a movable combination disposed on the front left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and appears in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 as shown in FIG. 190 when moved to the effect position. It is supposed to As shown in FIG. 191, the second character role unit 3180 includes a character unit 3190 and a door unit 3220. As shown in FIG. 192 to FIG. 194, the character unit 3190 is housed in a box-like case member 3191 whose front and right sides are open, and inside the case member 3191, and is made to project from the right side of the case member 3191. A movable character body 3192 capable of moving and a driving device 3199 for moving the movable character body 3192 are configured. Here, the movable character body 3192 corresponds to the movable decorative portion of the present invention.

  Movable character body 3192 is a decorative body 3193 formed by imitating a second character (hereinafter referred to as a "mouse character") for imaging a rat, and light is applied to the decorative body 3193 from the rear side to cause light emission decoration. A light emitting substrate 3194, and a sliding member 3195 which is assembled to the decorative body 3193 and the light emitting substrate 3194 and supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The sliding member 3195 is a member having a substantially U-shaped cross section, and is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction. Also, the movable character body 3192 is provided with a left hand portion 3196 shaped to imitate the left hand of the rat character, and can be moved separately from the decorative body 3193 consisting of the face and upper half of the rat character. Here, the decorative body 3193 corresponds to the main decorative body of the present invention, and the left hand portion 3196 corresponds to the additional decorative body of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 193 and 195, the drive device 3199 is housed in the drive motor 3204 disposed on the rear surface of the case member 3191 and inside the case member 3191, and the drive force of the drive motor 3204 is a movable character. It comprises a drive mechanism 3199a for transmitting to the body 3192. The drive mechanism 3199a is supported slidably in the left-right direction by the rear support plate 3209 and a second rack 3207 described later, and supports the movable character body 3192. The movable base unit 3200 includes a base plate 3201 and a cover member 3202. And the first gear 3203 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3204 and the front surface of the movable base unit 3200, and is engaged with the first gear 3203 to rotate the first gear 3203 as the movable base unit A first rack 3205 for converting it into a linear motion in the left and right direction of the 3200, a second gear 3206 which is disposed on the movable base unit 3200 (base plate 3201) and rotatably supported, and is fixed to the case member 3191 , And the second gear 3206, the movable base unit 320 The second rack 3207 converts the linear motion of the second gear 3206 into the rotational movement of the second gear 3206 and the movable character body 3192 is engaged with the second gear 3206 and the rotational movement of the second gear 3206 is the movable character 3192 A third rack 3208 for moving the movable character body 3192 on the movable base unit 3200 in the same direction as the movement direction of the movable base unit 3200 by converting it into linear motion in the left and right direction of ing. Here, the drive motor 3204 corresponds to the drive source and motor of the present invention, the first gear 3203 and the first rack 3205 correspond to the first transmission mechanism of the present invention, and the second gear 3206 and the second rack 3207 are present. The third rack 3208 corresponds to the second transmission mechanism of the present invention.

  According to this drive mechanism 3199a, when the drive motor 3204 operates and the first gear 3203 rotates, power is transmitted to the movable base unit 3200 via the first rack 3205 meshed with the first gear 3203. That is, the rotational movement of the first gear 3203 is converted to linear movement by the first rack 3205, and the movable base unit 3200 moves to the right. Here, a movable character body 3192 is provided on the movable base unit 3200, and the movable character body 3192 also moves in a predetermined direction together with the movable base unit 3200.

  On the other hand, the movable base unit 3200 is provided with the second gear 3206 rotatably supported, and the second gear 3206 is engaged with the second rack 3207 fixed to the case member 3191. When the unit 3200 moves, the linear motion of the movable base unit 3200 is converted to the rotational motion of the second gear 3206.

  Since the movable character body 3192 is slidably supported on the movable base unit 3200 and includes the third rack 3208 meshing with the second gear 3206, the rotational movement of the second gear 3206 is the movable character body 3192 ( The movable character body 3192 is converted into the linear motion of the third rack 3208), and moves on the movable base unit 3200 in the same direction as the traveling direction (that is, the right direction). As a result, the relative movement distance of the movable character body 3192 is obtained by adding the movement distance of the movable character body 3192 itself to the movement distance of the movable base unit 3200. Therefore, even when the arrangement space of the drive device 3199 is relatively narrow, the movable character body 3192 can be moved to a large extent, which in turn can increase the impact of the movable character body 3192 in the effect. Further, since the driving force for moving the movable character body 3192 is generated by the second rack 3207 and the second gear 3206, a relatively simple and inexpensive configuration can be achieved.

  In addition, the second rack 3207 and the third rack 3208 are disposed opposite to each other, and the second gear 3206 consisting of spur gears is interposed between them, so that the whole mechanism is extremely simplified. And the whole can be miniaturized. Further, since the number of second gears 3206 is one, the traveling direction of movable base unit 3200 with respect to second rack 3207 and the traveling direction of third rack 3208 (that is, the traveling direction of movable character body 3192) are made to coincide. It has become possible.

  In addition, since the decorative body 3193 provided in the movable character body 3192 is a three-dimensional object modeled on the second character "mouse character", the player can see the rat character moving largely. It can be visually recognized, and it is possible to enhance visual effects.

  Further, since the sliding member 3195 slidably supported relative to the movable base unit 3200 is formed long along the left-right direction, the area of the sliding surface relative to the movable base unit 3200 should be relatively large. And can slide in a stable state. In particular, since the third rack 3208 is attached to the sliding member 3195, power can be transmitted to the vicinity of the sliding portion, and the twisting of the movable character body 3192 with the sliding portion as a fulcrum is suppressed. It is possible. Further, in the case where the sliding member 3195 is elongated along the lateral direction as described above, a space is formed between the movable base unit 3200 and the light emitting substrate 3194. By arranging the second gear 3206, the second gear 3206 can be meshed with the second rack 3207, and even when the second gear 3206 is relatively large, an arrangement space can be easily secured. ing.

  Further, the movable base unit 3200 is configured to include a plate-shaped base plate 3201 and a cover member 3202 attached thereto, and the cover member 3202 makes the base plate 3201, the second gear 3206, and the third rack 3208 It is shielded. The first gear 3203 is shielded by a gear cover 3211 attached to the case member 3191. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the transmission mechanism such as the second gear 3206 and the third rack 3208 from being exposed as a background of the movable character body 3192, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance.

  Further, the cover member 3202 is formed with a guide portion 3202a for guiding the movement of the third rack 3208 and the sliding member 3195 in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism for guiding the sliding member 3195 and the like, and the entire configuration can be further simplified.

  Further, the base plate 3201 is provided with an elongated hole 3201a formed along the left-right direction, and the rear surface of the third rack 3208 is provided with a projection 3208a inserted into the elongated hole 3201a of the base plate 3201 (see FIG. 194). ) Is formed. Therefore, the moving directions of the third rack 3208 and the sliding member 3195 are restricted, and the third rack 3208 and the sliding member 3195 are guided more smoothly in the left-right direction. Further, the movable range of the movable character body 3192 is limited by the length of the long hole 3201a, and it is possible to accurately determine the end position in the traveling direction.

  By the way, when the movable character body 3192 moves to a predetermined position, the left hand portion 3196 provided as a part of the movable character body 3192 moves using power in the moving direction (that is, the right direction) of the movable character body 3192. It is designed to be displaced in a direction different from the direction. As described in detail with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196, the left hand portion 3196 is formed to be elongated in the left and right direction, and the left end portion is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the sliding member 3195. An extended arm portion 3196a is provided. In addition, a spring 3197 is attached to the left hand portion 3196 for urging the left hand portion 3196 to the first position side (clockwise direction side). On the other hand, the base plate 3201 is formed with an abutting portion 3201b which is extended rightward from the right end and further curved forward, and when the movable character body 3192 (sliding member 3195) moves to a predetermined position ( 196 (see FIG. 196A), the arm portion 3196a abuts on the abutting portion 3201b, and the left hand portion 3196 can be moved to the second position side (counterclockwise direction) by using the movement of the movable character body 3192 (See FIG. 196 (b)). When the movable character 3192 (sliding member 3195) moves to the left from the state shown in FIG. 196 (b), the left hand portion 3196 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the biasing force of the spring 3197. ing. Since the contact portion 3201b which contacts the arm portion 3196a is provided at the tip of the base plate 3201, even after the movable character body 3192 is moved relatively largely with respect to the movable base unit 3200. The arm portion 3196a can be in contact with the contact portion 3201b. Here, what combined arm part 3196a, spring 3197, and contact part 3201b corresponds to a transmission part for ornaments.

  In this manner, when the movable character body 3192 moves to a predetermined position, the left hand portion 3196 is displaced in a direction different from the traveling direction of the movable character body 3192, so the movement of the entire movable character body 3192 is complicated. It is possible to enhance the stage effect. In particular, the left hand portion 3196 is displaced using the power when the movable character body 3192 moves in the direction of travel, so that the left hand portion 3196 can be moved without separately providing a dedicated drive source.

  In particular, the predetermined position at which the left hand portion 3196 starts to be displaced is in front of the movable end position of the movable character body 3192 and receives the mechanical operation of moving the movable character body 3192 from the predetermined position to the movable end position. In order to move the 3196 from the first position (see FIG. 196A) to the second position (see FIG. 196B), the left hand portion 3196 is displaced just before the movable character body 3192 stops at the movable end position. As a result, the movement of the movable character body 3192 can be watched until the end (until it stops).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 192, since the left hand portion 3196 is disposed at the tip of the movable character body 3192 in the advancing direction, the tip portion of the movable character body 3192 can be focused on. It makes it possible to make people feel longer. In particular, since the left hand portion 3196 of the tip moves, it is possible to evoke an image that the movable character body 3192 extends in the traveling direction, and make the movable character body 3192 appear larger.

  Further, since the left hand portion 3196 is supported rotatably in the longitudinal direction, by converting the linear motion of the movable character body 3192 into the rotational motion of the left hand portion 3196, the left hand portion 3196 follows an arc. Can be moved. Therefore, it is possible to move the left hand portion 3196 in a direction different from the traveling direction of the movable character body 3192 with an extremely simple configuration.

  In addition, the left hand portion 3196 is smaller than the decorative body 3193, and the moving distance thereof is shorter than the moving distance of the decorative body 3193. Therefore, the left hand portion 3196 may be less noticeable than the decorative body 3193. As a result, the movement of the left hand 3196 can be stared.

  Furthermore, since the left hand 3196 is a shaped object related to the decoration 3193, the movement of the left hand 3196 can be shown to be related to the movement of the decoration 3193, even if the movement of the left hand 3196 is extremely small. Even if there is, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by the movement. In particular, after making the decorative body 3193 imitating the face and upper body of the "mute character" appear, moving the left hand 3196 imitating the hand makes it appear as if the "mature character" is waving. It is possible to give a sense of movement to the movement of the "mouse character".

  In addition, since the movable base unit 3200 is arranged such that the decorative body 3193 is positioned in front of the movable base unit 3200, the decorative base 3193 faces the player and the movable base unit 3200 is made of the decorative body 3193. It is possible to make it visible as a background. For this reason, the whole space which accommodates the decoration 3193 moves, Furthermore, the image which the decoration 3193 pops out from the space can be recalled, and it becomes possible to improve the dynamic feeling of the decoration 3193.

  In addition, the movable character body 3192 moves between the standby position shielded by the game panel 600 and the effect position which can be visually recognized through the opening window 2300 a of the center character 2300. For this reason, it is possible to change (show or hide) the visible state of the movable character body 3192, and it is possible to give the player a great impact. In particular, by moving the movable character body 3192 to a large extent, it is possible to visually recognize the substantially entire surface of the decorative body 3193 at the effect position (see FIG. 190).

  Furthermore, in this example, by controlling the movement stop position of the movable character body 3192, the expected large position in which the left hand portion 3196 moves and the expected small position in which the left hand portion 3196 does not move are distinguished. State) is suggested. That is, when the possibility of becoming a big hit is high, the movable character body 3192 is moved to the position where the left hand part 3196 moves (expected large position) (see FIG. 196 (b)). If it is low, the movement of the movable character body 3192 is stopped at the expected small position before reaching the expected large position (see FIG. 196 (a)). Therefore, by making it possible to visually recognize whether or not the left hand portion 3196 moves, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation for the special lottery result, and it is possible to further increase the attention to the left hand portion 3196.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the door unit 3220 is capable of opening and closing the right opening of the case member 3191 in the character unit 3190 (see FIG. 192). A door wall 3221 which is disposed and provided with an entrance 3221a of the movable character body 3192, a door 3222 which is disposed on the right of the door wall 3221 and closes the entrance 3221a, and an entrance at the left side of the door wall 3221 A light emitting substrate 3224 is provided so as to surround 3221 a, and emits light to the door wall 3221 through the door back lens 3223. The door 3222 has a rear end portion as a rotating shaft (not shown) and is supported so as to be openable toward the inside of the center part 2300. The upper door wall 3221 of the door 3222 has a bulb-shaped decorative body 3227 is attached by a light bulb holder 3228.

  In addition, a motor case 3230 whose upper surface is opened is provided to extend leftward from the lower end of the door wall portion 3221, and a drive motor 3232 accommodated in a motor cover 3231 is disposed on the lower surface of the motor case 3230. In the motor case 3230, a mechanism that opens and closes the door 3222 by the power of the drive motor 3232, that is, a door cam 3233 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3232 and a rotation of the door cam 3233 A first link 3234, a second link 3235, and a third link 3236 are provided that transmit near the rotation axis of 3222. The motor case 3230 is provided with a photo sensor 3237 that detects the original position of the door 3222 by detecting a detection piece 3233 a formed on the door cam 3233. Here, a combination of the drive motor 3232, the door cam 3233, the first link 3234, the second link 3235, and the third link 3236 corresponds to the turning mechanism of the present invention.

  As described above, since the entrance 3221a of the movable character body 3192 is closed by the door 3222, the movable character body 3192 disposed at the standby position is in an invisible or hard-to-visible state from the entrance 321a side. Therefore, when the movable character body 3192 jumps out toward the effect position, it is possible to give the player a greater impact by an unexpected operation. In particular, since the door 3222 is opened toward the inside of the center character 2300 centering on the rotation shaft (not shown) on the rear end side, the door of the movable character body 3192 is viewed from the player side. The moving direction (projecting direction) and the opening direction of the door 3222 can be made to coincide, and the movement of the movable character 3192 can be made to look strong as if the movable character 3192 pushes the door 3222 open. It has become. In addition, when the movable character body 3192 moves to the effect position, the inner surface of the door 3222 becomes visible as the background of the movable character body 3192. Therefore, the sense of reality is enhanced by three-dimensional decoration.

  Furthermore, when moving the movable character body 3192 from the standby position to the effect position, first, the door 3222 is opened by the operation of the drive motor 3232. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the movable character body 3192 from colliding with the door body 3222, and to prevent breakage of the movable character body 3192. Further, by opening the door body 3222, a sense of expectation for the appearance of the movable character body 3192 is enhanced, and the movement of the movable character body 3192 can be noticed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199, a transparent warp passage forming member 2318 forming the warp passage 2318a is disposed in front of the movable character body 3192 (particularly the decoration 3193) in the standby position. On the front side of the forming member 2318, a telephone box type decoration 2317 having a viewing window 2317a is disposed. That is, it is possible to show the decoration 3193 in the standby position through the viewing window 2317a. Therefore, by showing the decorative body 3193 hidden behind the game panel 600 or the center unit 2310 as the background of the warp passage 2318a, the motivation to look inside through the viewing window 2317a is heightened, and It is possible to reduce dissatisfaction with it even when it is not visible. Furthermore, by showing the decorative body 3193 hidden in the standby position, it is possible to make the user aware of the presence of the movable character body 3192 and to make the motion of the movable character body 3192 interested.

  In particular, since the decorative body 3193 of the movable character body 3192 is shaped to imitate the "mouse character", it enhances the interest in the movable character body 3192 and also the internal space seen through the observation window 2317a ) Can evoke an image as if a "mouse character" lives, and it is possible to further enhance the motivation to look into it. In addition, since the observation window 2317a has a size in which only a part of the decoration 3193 is visible, it is necessary to differentiate between an effect position where the full view of the decoration 3193 can be seen and a standby position where it disappears and disappears. It is possible to suppress the reduction of the impact at the presentation position.

  In addition, since the decorative body 3193 at the standby position is lighted by the light emitting substrate 3194, the appearance of the decorative body 3193 can be clearly viewed even if the space in which the movable character body 3192 is arranged is dark. It can be enhanced. The light emission state of the light emitting substrate 3194 is controlled by the light emission state control means so that it can be switched between a state where the decorative body 3193 can be clearly seen and a state where the decorative body 3193 disappears (or a state where it becomes difficult to see). There is. For this reason, it is possible to sharpen the result of looking into it, and it is possible to evoke a feeling of happiness with respect to having been able to visually recognize the decorative body 3193.

  By the way, the space on the rear side of the game panel 600 is limited in size, and furthermore, the movable character body 3192 must be formed to be large enough to stand out, so the size of the drive device 3199 (see FIG. 193) is limited. It will be done. In particular, since the drive motor 3204 is provided so as to project rearward from the drive mechanism 3199a and the case member 3191, the overall size of the drive device 3199 tends to be relatively large, and can be disposed in a limited space. It will be difficult. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, an opening 3364 having a size enabling insertion of the drive motor 3204 is formed in the motor drive board 3363 disposed on the rear side of the drive device 3199. It is done. Therefore, by inserting the drive motor 3204 into the opening 3364, the drive device 3199 and the motor drive board 3363 can be disposed close to each other. That is, since the arrangement space of the drive motor 3204 is secured, even if the space in front of the motor drive board 3363 is relatively narrow, it is easy to arrange the entire drive device 3199 in a limited space It becomes.

  In particular, the opening 3364 formed in the motor drive board 3363 has a shape into which the drive motor 3204 is inserted, that is, a shape substantially matching the outer shape of the drive motor 3204, and the drive motor 3204 is fitted into the motor drive board 3363 It is in a state of Therefore, when assembling the drive 3199 after assembling the motor drive board 3363, the opening 3364 of the motor drive board 3363 functions as a positioning and guide when assembling the drive 3199, and On the other hand, it is possible to assemble the drive device 3199 in the correct position. In addition, conversely, when assembling the motor drive board 3363 after assembling the drive device 3199, the drive motor 3204 functions as positioning and guide at the time of assembling the motor drive board 3363, and the motor relative to the drive device 3199 It becomes possible to assemble the drive substrate 3363 in the correct position.

  Further, the motor drive board 3363 disposed on the rear side of the drive device 3199 is disposed with the mounting surface 3363 c of the electronic component 3363 a facing the rear side. In other words, the electronic component 3363a is not mounted on the front surface of the mounting surface 3363c, which is a flat surface. Therefore, the motor drive board 3363 and the drive mechanism 3199a can be further approached, and securing of the arrangement space in the drive device 3199 is further facilitated.

  The motor drive board 3363 is covered with a resin motor drive board case 3368, and the electronic components 3363a arranged on the mounting surface 3363c and the electric circuit on the motor drive board 3363 are protected. In particular, in the motor drive board case 3368, the hole 3371 is provided at a position facing the opening 3364 of the motor drive board 3363, and the drive motor 3204 can be used as the motor drive board even when the drive motor 3204 protrudes significantly. By inserting through the hole 3371 of the case 3368, the drive device 3199 and the motor drive substrate 3363 can be disposed close to each other without abutting on the motor drive substrate case 3368. In addition, since the heat of the drive motor 3204 can be released to the outside of the motor drive board case 3368 through the hole portion 3371, it is possible to suppress the overheat of the drive motor 3204.

  In the motor drive board case 3368, a cylindrical projecting cylindrical portion 3372 communicating with the hole 3371 is formed to project forward from the inner surface of the motor drive board case 3368, and the internal space thereof is the drive motor 3204. It almost matches the outline of. That is, it is possible to insert the drive motor 3204 straight and smoothly into the projecting cylindrical portion 3372.

  Further, motor drive board case 3368 is formed of thick portion 3369 and thin portion 3370 to correspond to the height of electronic component 3363 a protruding from mounting surface 3363 c, and protruding cylindrical portion 3372 has a thickness of It is provided in the thick part 3369. Therefore, the distance between the inner surface of the motor drive board case 3368 and the motor drive board 3363 is increased, and the length of the projecting cylindrical portion 3372 is formed to be relatively long. In addition, since the drive motor 3204 is accommodated in the projecting cylindrical portion 3372 without projecting outside the motor drive substrate case 3368, the drive motor 3204 can be protected by the motor drive substrate case 3368, and the drive motor 3204 is It is possible to prevent the damage of

  Further, a harness 3204a for supplying power is provided in the drive motor 3204, and a connection terminal 3363b to which a connector 3204b at the tip of the harness 3204a is connected is mounted on the mounting surface 3363c of the motor drive board 3363. . The connection terminal 3363 b is provided to penetrate the opening 3368 a formed in the thin portion 3370 of the motor drive board case 3368 so that the connector 3204 b is connected from the rear of the motor drive board case 3368. Is configured. Further, since the harness 3204a is wired through the opening 3364 and the projecting cylindrical portion 3372, it can be wired extremely easily regardless of the size of the motor drive board 3363 or the motor drive board case 3368. Moreover, the length of the harness 3204a can be shortened as much as possible. Since the projecting cylindrical portion 3372 is formed at the boundary between the thick portion 3369 and the thin portion 3370 of the thickness (projecting height from the substrate) in the motor drive substrate case 3368, the drive motor 3204 is formed by the thick portion 3369. It is possible to pull out the harness 3204a from the thin portion 3370 to the outside of the motor drive board case 3368 while protecting it. Therefore, the length of the harness 3204a can be further shortened, and it is possible to prevent the harness 3204a from protruding to the rear of the motor drive board case 3368 and, consequently, to suppress the disconnection of the harness 3204a.

  In addition, the drive device 3199 is disposed in the back box 3001 (see FIG. 221), while the motor drive board 3363 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3001. As shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, the back box 3001 is formed with a through hole 3001 d that matches the opening 3364 of the motor drive board 3363. Therefore, the drive motor 3204 protruding rearward from the drive mechanism 3199a can be inserted into the through hole 3001d of the back box 3001 and the opening 3364 of the motor drive board 3363, and the motor drive board 3363 is mounted on the rear surface. It is possible to arrange the back box 3001 and the drive device 3199 close to each other. Therefore, even if the installation space in the back box 3001 is relatively narrow, it becomes easy to accommodate the drive device 3199 in the back box 3001.

  Next, the model unit 3240 will be described in detail. The vertical character product unit 3240 is a movable character disposed on the front right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and appears in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 as shown in FIG. It is supposed to be. As shown in FIGS. 205 to 207, the vertical character product unit 3240 has a motion in which “壷” falls over in the left horizontal direction, that is, a side surface of “壷” located above the center of gravity of “壷”. It has a mechanism that simulates the motion to resemble movement similar to that of "falling" that occurs when an external force in the substantially left direction is applied, thereby making the vertical decoration 3241 a reality It can be held.

  If it demonstrates in detail based on FIG. 203 thru | or FIG. 205, the bowl-shaped character article unit 3240 irradiates a light from the back side with respect to the bowl-shaped decoration body 3241 modeled on "壷", and the bowl-shaped decoration body 3241. A light emitting substrate 3242 for emitting and decorating light, and a driving device 3243 for simulating the wedge-shaped decorative body 3241 and the light emitting substrate 3242 as described above are configured. Drive device 3243 rotates relative to motor stand 3244 which is a base member, drive motor 3245 disposed on the rear surface of motor stand 3244, gear 3246 connected to the rotational shaft of drive motor 3245, and motor stand 3244. And an arm member 3247 having a gear portion 3247c rotatably supported about a shaft 3247a and engaged with the gear 3246.

  The arm member 3247 is formed in a substantially “く” shape, and the connection portion 3247 d at the upper end is pivotally supported by the upper connection portion 3241 a of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241 via the first shaft member 3248. Further, the left side of the motor stand 3244 is extended upward, and a guide portion 3244a consisting of a long hole formed in a substantially arc shape toward the upper left side is formed in that portion. The second shaft member 3249 slidably supported by the roller 3250 and the washer 3251 is inserted into the guide portion 3244a. The second shaft member 3249 is disposed in parallel to the first shaft member 3248, and its tip end is pivotally supported by the lower connection portion 3241 b of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241.

  According to this, when the motive power of the drive motor 3245 is transmitted to the arm member 3247 via the gear 3246, the arm member 3247 pivots around the rotation shaft 3247a disposed below the wedge-shaped decorative body 3241. Since the connecting portion 3247 d at the upper end of the arm member 3247 is connected to the upper connecting portion 3241 a of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241, the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241 also pivots around the rotation axis 3247 a. In addition, since the connecting portion 3247 d of the arm member 3247 is connected to the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241 via the first shaft member 3248, the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241 can be rotated about the tip of the arm member 3247. It has become.

  On the other hand, since the second shaft member 3249 is connected to the lower connection portion 3241b of the cage-shaped decorative body 3241 and the second shaft member 3249 is guided in the displacement direction by the guide portion 3244a When the decorative body 3241 pivots about the rotation axis 3247a, the displacement direction of the second shaft member 3249 accompanying the pivoting is guided by the guide portion 3244a, and the wedge-shaped decorative body 3241 pivots about the upper connection portion 3241a (rotation) ). In other words, the vertical decorative body 3241 moves in a substantially horizontal direction along an arc of a large diameter centered on the rotation axis 3247 a provided on the outside (downward) of the vertical decorative body 3241. It will rotate on the upper upper connection portion 3241a.

  That is, by moving the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241 in a substantially horizontal direction along the arc of large diameter, a substantially horizontal movement is generated when a horizontal external force is applied to the side surface of the "bar", while By rotating the wedge-shaped decorative body 3241, a motion due to the position to which an external force is applied being on the upper side of the center of gravity of the bottle (that is, a rotational motion to turn over about the center of gravity). Therefore, by combining the two rotation mechanisms, it is displaced from the standby position (original position) shown in FIG. 205 to an intermediate position shown in FIG. 206, and further displaced to the effect position shown in FIG. It has become possible to realize movements that mimic the actual fall movement. In particular, when rotating the cage-shaped decorative body 3241, since the rotation of the cage-shaped decorative body 3241 is used as a motive power, a power source for rotating the cage-shaped decorative body 3241 becomes unnecessary, and thus the entire mechanism is compact. And cost reduction are possible.

  By the way, the first shaft member 3248 and the second shaft member 3249 are both supported by the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241, and the distance between them is always constant. Therefore, when the connecting portion 3247d at the tip end of the arm member 3247 moves on a large arc, the second shaft member 3249 is largely displaced accordingly, and the guide portion 3244a for guiding the displacement direction of the second shaft member 3249 is also largely Could be On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second shaft member 3249 is disposed near the rotation shaft 3247a because the second shaft member 3249 is disposed at the edge on the rotation shaft 3247a side in the lower part of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241. As a result, the movable range of the second shaft member 3249 can be reduced, and hence the guide portion 3244a can be configured smaller.

  Further, the upper portion of the arm member 3247 is greatly extended to the right, and a supporting portion 3247b formed of a substantially arc-shaped elongated hole extending in the vertical direction is formed at an end portion thereof. An auxiliary shaft portion 3252 slidably supported via a washer 3253 is inserted in the support portion 3247 b. The auxiliary shaft portion 3252 is disposed in parallel to the first shaft member 3248, and its tip is connected to the intermediate connection portion 3241 c of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241. Thus, by providing the auxiliary shaft portion 3252 at the intermediate connection portion 3241 c (in particular, the edge opposite to the lower connection portion 3241 b) of the wedge-shaped ornament 3241, the wedge-shaped ornament 3241 is supported at three points, Even when the boat-shaped decorative body 3241 is moved vigorously, it can be moved in a stable state. In addition, since the support portion 3247b is integrally formed on the arm member 3247, the number of parts is reduced, and the structure can be further simplified.

  Further, the motor stand 3244 includes a photosensor 3254 for detecting the reference position of the arm member 3247, a harness hanger 3258 for suspending and supporting a harness H (see FIG. 203) connected to the light emitting substrate 3242 and a drive motor 3245 A relay substrate 3259 for relaying a drive signal to the light emitting substrate 3242 is also attached. A vertically long hole 3258a is formed in the upper part of the harness hanger 3258 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to wire the harness H through the hole 3258a. More specifically, the harness H connects the light emitting substrate 3242 movable with the vertical decorative body 3241 and the relay substrate 3259 fixed to the motor stand 3244, and is rearward from the guide portion 3242a at the lower end of the light emitting substrate 3242 After the harness H drawn out is passed through the hole 3258a of the harness hanger 3258, it is wired so as to hang down along the rear surface of the harness hanger 3258. The hole 3258a is located behind the guide portion 3242a when the wedge-shaped decorative body 3241 reaches the intermediate position (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 203), and has a predetermined distance between the hole 3258a and the guide portion 3242a. Are arranged. In addition, the length of the harness H bridged between the hole 3258a and the guide portion 3242a is longer than the predetermined interval, and the light emitting substrate is not subjected to tension (mechanical load) on the harness H. It is possible to turn 3242 between the effect position and the standby position.

  By the way, the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241 is moved between the standby position shielded by the center character 2300 or the game panel 600 and the effect position which becomes visible through the opening window 2300a of the center character 2300. There is. For this reason, it is possible to make the decorative ornament 3241 look and hide, and it is possible to increase the impact on the player. In particular, when the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241 appears, since it falls while jumping out in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform a powerful presentation.

  Next, the combination product unit 3270 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 208 and 209, the combination product unit 3270 is disposed on the front lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a television type character 3271 disposed on the front lower right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The movable part is a combination of the earth-shaped part 3272 and the movable part, and when it is moved to the rendering position, it appears in front of the liquid crystal display 1400 as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 209 and 210, the combination product unit 3270 includes a motor base 3275 which is a base member, a cover member 3276 mounted on the front of the motor base 3275, and a television provided on the right side of the motor base 3275. And a frame-shaped light emitting substrate 3278 that emits light by emitting light from the rear side to the television frame type decorative body 3277. . Also, as shown in FIGS. 210 to 212, as a mechanism for rotating the television frame type decorative body 3277, a drive motor 3279 disposed on the rear surface of the motor base 3275 and a drive disposed on the front side of the motor base 3275 The first gear 3280 connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3279 and the second gear 3281 meshed with the first gear 3280 are provided, and the left arm portion 3277a extended from the lower left of the television frame type decorative body 3277 It is connected to the rotation shaft 3282 of the second gear 3281. The lower end of the right arm portion 3277 b extended from the lower right of the television frame type decorative body 3277 is inserted into an arc-shaped guide groove 3275 a formed along the right side surface of the motor base 3275. It is supported.

  According to this, when the drive motor 3279 operates and the first gear 3280 rotates, the rotational motion is transmitted to the left arm portion 3277a of the television frame type decorative body 3277 via the second gear 3281 and the rotation shaft 3282, and the television frame The mold decoration 3277 rotates around a rotation axis 3282. For example, in the case of displacement from the standby position to the effect position, the tilt state shown in FIG. 209 is changed to the hanging state shown in FIG. In addition, since the lower end of the right arm portion 3277b in the television frame type decorative body 3277 is guided along the guide groove 3275a, it smoothly rotates and the rotation range is limited.

  On the other hand, the earth-tube-type product 3272 has a soil-tube main body 3290 shaped to imitate a "earth pipe", a light emitting substrate 3291 for emitting light by irradiating light from the rear side to the earth-tube main body 3290, and And a soil tube frame 3293 disposed on the lower side of the soil tube main body 3290. On the back surface of the earth pipe main body 3290, four guide bushes 3296 arranged vertically and horizontally are provided, and are inserted into a pair of vertical grooves 3275b formed at the center of the motor base 3275. In the center of the back surface of the earth pipe frame 3293, a rack (not shown) engaged with a gear 3295 described later is formed in the vertical direction. As a mechanism for moving up and down the earth pipe frame 3293 and the earth pipe main body 3290, a drive motor 3294 disposed on the rear surface of the motor base 3275 and a rack connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3294 and formed on the back surface of the earth pipe frame 3293 And a gear 3295 engaged with the gear. That is, when the drive motor 3294 operates and the gear 3295 rotates, the rotational motion is converted to linear motion by the rack, and the earth pipe frame 3293 and the earth pipe main body 3290 slide along the vertical groove 3275 b It has become).

  As shown in FIG. 210, on the rear surface of the earth pipe frame 3293, a magnetic attachment plate 3298 is disposed to face the magnet 3297 provided on the top of the motor base 3275, and the earth pipe frame 3293 is located When raised to the upper limit position, the magnetic attachment plate 3298 abuts on the magnet 3297, and the magnetic pipe main body 3290 and the earth pipe frame 3293 can be held in the effect position by the magnetic force. Also, as shown in FIG. 212, at the left end portion of the motor base 3275, a relay substrate 3299 housed in the housing portion 3275c is provided, and signals to the drive motor 3294 and the drive motor 3279 via the relay substrate 3299 Is to be relayed. Furthermore, in the motor base 3275, a photo sensor 3286 for detecting the reference position of the television frame type decorative body 3277 and the earth pipe frame 3293 is also provided.

  Next, the trap type character product unit 3310 will be described in detail. The trap type character unit 3310 is disposed on the lower right of the center character 2300 (see FIG. 208), as shown in FIGS. 214 and 215, at the tail of the first character, “cat character”. It is a movable role that is a combination of a corresponding tail-shaped character 3311 and a scaly-shaped character 3312 that imitates a trap for catching a "cat character". FIG. 214 shows the standby state (original position) before the tail-shaped character 3311 and the bowl-shaped character 3312 move, and FIG. 215 shows the effect after the tail-shaped character 3311 and the bowl-shaped character 3312 move. It shows the position.

  As shown in FIGS. 214 and 216, the trap type product unit 3310 includes a base member 3316, a tail main body 3313 rotatably supported on the front upper portion of the base member 3316, and a tail tip 3314 at the tip thereof. It comprises and comprises a bowl-shaped decorative body 3325 mounted on the lower front of the base member 3316. A trap lever 3326 is rotatably supported by the bowl-shaped decorative body 3325. In addition, light emitting substrates 3315 and 3327 are disposed on the rear side of the tail main body 3313 and on the rear side of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3325, respectively, so that light emission decoration can be performed. A light emitting substrate 3317 for emitting light to the entire rear surface of the base member 3316 is also disposed on the rear side of the base member 3316.

  In addition, as a mechanism for rotating the tail main body 3313 and the tail tip portion 3314, the drive motor 3318 disposed on the rear surface of the base member 3316 and the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3318 are connected to the tail main body 3313 A support member 3319 is provided. Note that a light shielding plate 3320 is formed on the support member 3319 so that the rotational position (original position) of the support member 3319 can be detected by the photo sensor 3321. Further, the drive motor 3318 is supported by a motor press 3322.

  In addition, the trap type product unit 3310 is a mechanism for rotating the trap lever 3326 of the bowl-shaped product 3312, a motor base 3330 disposed on the rear surface of the base member 3316, and a drive motor mounted on the motor base 3330. 3329 and an arm member 3331 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3329, and a lever clamp 3332 connected to the lever shaft 3328 of the trap lever 3326 is arranged to interfere with the tip of the arm member 3331 ing. That is, when the drive motor 3329 operates and the arm member 3331 rotates clockwise, it depresses the lever clamp 3332, and the trap lever 3326 is shown in FIG. 214 (standby state) to FIG. It is possible to displace the When the arm member 3331 is turned counterclockwise in the effect state, the lever clamp 3332 is bounced up by the biasing force of the spring 3332a, and the trap lever 3326 is returned to the original state (standby state). There is. The movable position of the arm member 3331, particularly, the original position is detected by the photo sensor 3333.

  Next, the ball guiding passage 3340 and the like disposed in the lower portion on the left side of the back box 3001 will be described. As shown in FIG. 217, the ball guiding passage 3340 is disposed at the rear of the side winning opening member 2100 (see FIG. 159), and the gaming ball having entered each winning opening 2101 of the side winning opening member 2100 is at a predetermined position. And is formed of a transparent member. In the upper right portion of the ball guiding passage 3340, a magnetic sensor 3345 for detecting an illegal game using a magnet is provided.

  Also, a star light emitting light guide plate 3341 integrally formed with the ball guiding passage 3340 is provided in the upper front of the ball guiding passage 3340, and a light emitting substrate 3344 is provided in the upper rear surface of the ball guiding passage 3340. Light can be emitted to the player through the plurality of through holes 600a disposed above the side winning opening member 2100 in the gaming panel 600 (see FIG. 151). Specifically, a plurality of cylindrical light guiding protrusions 3342 protruding forward are formed in the star light emitting light guide plate 3341. As shown in FIG. 218, each light guiding protrusion 3342 is a game panel. It is inserted from the rear side into a through hole 600 a formed in 600. That is, by guiding the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3344 to the front side of the game panel 600 through the light guide protrusion 3342, it is possible to make it look as if the front of the game panel 600 is glowing. A reinforcing portion 3343 is integrally formed between the adjacent light guide projecting portions 3342 to increase the strength of the light guide projecting portion 3342 and make the reinforcing portion 3343 abut on the back surface of the game panel 600. Thus, it is possible to accurately determine the relative position between the front surface of the game panel 600 and the tip of the light guide protrusion 3342.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, the lower front drive substrate 3361 is disposed on the front of the back box 3001 located behind the ball guiding passage 3340, and the upper left drive board is on the top of the back box 3001. 3362 is disposed. Further, on the rear side of the back box 3001, the motor drive board 3363, the lower lamp drive board 3365, the upper lamp drive board 3366, and the panel distribution board 3367 described above are disposed. The motor drive board 3363 is accommodated in the motor drive board case 3368 described above, the lower lamp drive board 3365 is accommodated in the lower lamp drive board case 3374, and the upper lamp drive board 3366 is accommodated in the upper lamp drive board case 3375. There is. Further, an LCD guide 3376 for supporting the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 219) is attached to the right side of the motor drive substrate 3363.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 219, a liquid crystal decoration unit 3350 is disposed around the liquid crystal display device 1400. The liquid crystal decoration unit 3350 includes a thin-plate shaped lower left decorative portion 3351 disposed at the front lower left of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a lower right decorative portion 3352 disposed at the front lower right of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is configured to include a right side decoration portion 3353 disposed on the right side, and a plurality of decoration frame seals 3354 pasted on the entire right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a block diagram of a main substrate and a peripheral substrate. The control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 includes a main control substrate 4100 for controlling a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control substrate 1186 for controlling payout of game balls and the like. On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 4010 group controls the rendering operation based on the command from the main control substrate 4100, and displays the effect image on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the command from the peripheral control substrate 4140. And a liquid crystal control substrate 3181 for controlling the In the illustrated configuration, the configuration related to the power supply is omitted.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 4100 controls the progress of the game. As shown in FIG. 223, the main control board 410 includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 624a. And. The main control MPU 4100a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 4100a detects the gaming ball received to the first starting opening 2001, the first starting opening sensor 2011, the second starting opening sensor 2349 for detecting the gaming ball received to the second starting opening 2002, and a part A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2014 is input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, or the magnetic sensor 3345 attached to the gate sensor 2202, the general winning opening sensor 2014, the count sensor 2013 and the back unit 3000. The detection signal from is input via the panel relay board 3247 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100 b. Based on these detection signals, main control MPU 4100 a outputs drive signals to starting opening solenoid 2015, attacker solenoid 2016, and special winning opening solenoid 2315 via main control I / O port 4100 b and panel relay board 3247. The first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage indicator 643, the first through the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3247, and the function display substrate 640a Two special symbol memory indicator 644, normal symbol indicator 645, ordinary symbol memory indicator 646, game state indicator 647, round indicator 648, the drive signal is output to the hold state indicator 3152 of center feature 2300 and the like . Here, the main control board 4100 corresponds to the gaming state control means of the present invention.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control substrate 1186 via the main drawer relay substrate 1107 described above, and a pachinko machine from the payout control substrate 1186 Various commands and the like regarding the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107 or the like. Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The substrates of the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral control substrate 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, as described in detail later, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 1136, the detailed description of which will be described later. The power supply substrate 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by this capacitor. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624 a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 1136, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. This blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 etc via the not-shown harness.

[3-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 223, the payout control board 1186 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to the payout, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 described above, and An error LED display 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball pull switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 223, the payout control unit 4110 for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 1186 includes a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110 c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110 c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110 a is operating normally, and a payout motor drive circuit 4110 d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above; It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and further incorporates a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout, as will be described in detail later, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. Receive a signal (detection signal). In addition, the payout control MPU 4110a receives a detection signal from the full tank switch 916, or receives detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 778, the count switch 812 and the rotation angle switch 855 via the in-prism unit relay terminal plate 830. Do.

  Further, when the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the received various commands relating to payout. Further, when the ball removing switch 4132 is operated, the payout control MPU 4110 a discharges the game balls stored in the winning ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 described above based on the operation signal (detection signal) (ball A drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d to the payout motor 815 for removal. Further, the payout control MPU 4110a receives the ball request signal from the CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the ball request signal when the ball request signal is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b. A drive signal is output to the payout motor 815. Further, when the detection signal from the full switch 916 is input, the payout control MPU 4110 a stops the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d to the payout motor 815 based on the detection signal to stop the payout motor 815. .

  Furthermore, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, and transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100. When the detection signal from the count switch 812 is input, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out to the external terminal board 1150a based on the detection signal. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  On the other hand, the emission control unit 4120 performs emission control of the emission motor 695 in the payout control substrate 1186. As shown in FIG. 223, the emission control unit 4120 has an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, a transmission circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and rotation of the emission motor 695 based on the clock signal. A launch control circuit 4120c outputs a reference pulse that determines the speed, and a launch motor drive circuit 4120d outputs a drive signal to the launch motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the launch control circuit 4120c. The firing control circuit 4120 c controls the rotational speed of the firing motor 695 so that about 99.95 gaming balls per minute are shot toward the playing area 605 based on the clock signal from the sending circuit 4120 b. . In other words, the movement of the above-described hitting rod 687 is controlled.

  As described above, the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are built in the above-described handle device 460 (operation handle portion 410), and when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 410 is touched, the touch sensor When the single-shot button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. These detection signals are input to the input circuit 4120a through the above-described handle relay terminal board 194, the detailed description of which will be described later. Also, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a through the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied from the power supply substrate 1136 to the payout control substrate 1186 in the same manner as the main control substrate 4100. The power supply substrate 1136 includes a capacitor for supplying power to the payout control substrate 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4140 performs effect control on the peripheral board 4010. As shown in FIG. 223, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a, a peripheral control ROM 4140b, a sound source IC 4140c, a sound ROM 4140d, an external RTC (external RTC shown) and a battery 4140f. The peripheral control MPU 4140a is an example of a processor such as a microprocessor, and incorporates a built-in real-time clock described later. In the present embodiment, the externally attached RTC 4140 e adopts one having a measurement accuracy higher than that of the built-in real-time clock. The peripheral control ROM 4140 b stores various processing programs and various commands. The sound source IC 4140 c has a function of performing high-quality sound while referring to the sound ROM 4140 d in which sound information such as music and sound effects are stored.

  The external RTC 4140 e has a function of continuously generating information on the current time (hereinafter referred to as “current time information”). For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, the external RTC 4140 e is written with real time information on real time when it is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140. The battery 4140 f has a function of continuing the power supply to the external RTC 4140 e while the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 (main power supply) is stopped. The power supply substrate 395 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit (not shown). The power failure monitoring circuit has a function of outputting a power failure notification signal before the supply of power from the main power supply is stopped.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives various commands from the main control board 4100, it controls the following rendering operation based on the various commands. That is, as an example of the effect operation, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs a door frame side on / off command to the lamp driving board 3167 to output a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the LED of each decorative board provided on the door frame 5. The game board side lighting blinking command for outputting a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the LED of each light emitting decoration board 3606 provided on the game board 4 is outputted to the lamp driving board 3167. In addition, as an example of the rendering operation, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs a rotation drive signal to the left rotation light motor 245, the right rotation light motor 265, and the central rotation light motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 The door frame side motor drive command for outputting the motor is outputted to the motor drive board 3013a, or the drive motor 2343, 3043, 3088, 3127, 3166, 3202, 3232, 3245, 3279, 3294, 3318, provided in the game board 4. A game board side motor drive command for outputting a rotational drive signal to 3329 is output to the motor drive board 3013a. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs a control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d to the sound source IC 4140c as an example of the rendering operation, or a display command indicating a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is outputted to the liquid crystal control board 3181. Here, the peripheral control board 4140 outputs a control signal for opening the door 3222 or selecting the stop position of the movable character body 3192 to the second character product unit 3180.

  Display commands output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 3181 are exchanged via the serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, 19.2 kbps is set as the bit rate. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, door frame side motor drive command, game board side motor drive command output from peripheral control MPU 4140a to lamp drive board 3167 and motor drive board 3013a Are exchanged via a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the serial input / output port for the display command. In the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp drive board 3167 is configured to have a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command, and the decoration boards 126, 190, 206, 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , 225, 296, etc. Each light emitting decoration board 3606 provided on the game board 4 with a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blink command, the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5 Output to the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453 in FIG. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013a rotates the rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command, and the left rotation light motor 245 and the right rotation light motor 265 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay substrate 1108. , And various drive motors 2343, 3043, 3088, 3127, 3166, 3204, 3232 provided on the game board 4 with rotational drive signals based on the game board side motor drive commands output to the central rotary light motor 285 or received. , 3245, 3279, 3294, 3318, and 3329.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the position detection sensor via the motor drive board 3013a, and recognizes the original position based on these detection signals. The position detection sensor described above corresponds to photosensors 2349, 3052, 3098, 3131, 3133, 3210, 3237, 3254, 3286, 3321, 3333 and the like. This position detection sensor includes a movable shelf 2339 of the game board 4, a first character combination unit 3010, a sign type combination unit 3150, a second character combination unit 3180, a vertical combination unit 3240, and a combination combination unit 3270. The movable position of the trap type character unit 3310 is detected. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects the rotational position of the rotary lamps 244, 264 and 284 of the door frame 5, and the detection signals from the left rotational position detection sensor 250, the right rotational position detection sensor 270 and the central rotational position detection sensor 290 The rotational positions of the rotary lights 224, 264, 284 are grasped based on these detection signals, which are input via the sub drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013a. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control substrate 3181 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control substrate 3181 or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Operation detection signals from the main button sensor 376 and the sub button sensor 378 that detect the operation of the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are input through the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. The main button 371 is provided with a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. There is.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 via the lamp drive board 3167 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. Therefore, control is performed so that music and sound effects etc. matched to various effects flow.

  Peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) not shown, and peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the internal watchdog timer (internal WDT) in combination with external WDT. It is diagnosing whether the system of MPU4140a has runaway.

[3-4. Liquid Crystal Control Substrate]
Next, the liquid crystal control substrate 3181 has a function of performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral substrate 4010. The liquid crystal control board 3181 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 described above. A character ROM 4150 d stores various data of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a character RAM 4150 e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives the display command described above from the peripheral control substrate 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a controls the VDP 4150c based on the received display command to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the display command, nonresident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the display command, and the like, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screen drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constructed by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in character ROM 4150 d to a non-resident area described later of character RAM 4150 e in time series. . In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, it extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the first screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the head screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a is input, the VDP 4150 c extracts sprite data to be described later from the character RAM 4150 e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is a method to output.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a great deal of sprite data, and its capacity is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state. Here, “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing the respective persons is called "sprite". Accordingly, in the case where a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the positions arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other. The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays the pixels in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right of the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is driven by a main scan that sets a state, and a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction intersecting with the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control substrate 3181 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315 selects the liquid crystal display device 1400 as main scanning based on the drawing data for one line. Output to the pixels of one line sequentially from the left to the right. Then, when the output for one line is completed, it shifts to the line immediately below as the sub scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the liquid crystal display as the main scan based on the drawing data for the next line. The signals are sequentially output to pixels for one line sequentially from left to right of the device 1400.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 incorporates a backlight (cold cathode tube) which is lit by the inverter substrate 3017a.

[4. Real time clock]
FIG. 224 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a part of the peripheral control board 4140 etc. shown in FIG. In FIG. 224, the configuration of the peripheral control board 4140 is illustrated focusing on the portion related to the real time clock. The pachinko machine 1 includes a power supply substrate 395 (main power supply) that supplies power to the main control substrate 4100, the peripheral substrate 4010, and the like. The power supply substrate 395 corresponds to a main power supply, and starts or stops power supply to the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral substrate 4010 according to the operation state of the power switch 1137.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a is mounted with a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as "built-in real time clock") 4140g, and power is supplied by the power supply substrate 395. When the power switch 1137 is turned on by operation, it starts power supply to (the peripheral control MPU 4140a of) the peripheral control board 4140. That is, when power supply is continued by the power switch 1137, the peripheral control MPU 4140a also continues power supply to the built-in real time clock (corresponding to "built-in RTC" in the figure) 4140g.

  The battery 4140 f corresponds to a secondary power supply, and continuously supplies power to the external RTC 4140 e. The battery 4140 f stops power supply to the external RTC 4140 e when power is supplied by the power supply substrate 395. On the other hand, the battery 4140 f starts supplying power to the external RTC 4140 e when the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 is stopped.

  On the other hand, the external RTC 4140 e is connected to the battery 4140 f via the power supply switching unit 4140 h. The external RTC 4140 e continues to generate current time information on the current time while power is supplied, and provides the current time information to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a.

  The power supply switching unit 4140 h is switched, for example, under the control of the main control MPU 4100 a so that the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 is stopped when power is supplied to the external RTC 4140 e by the power supply substrate 395, When the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 is stopped, the power is switched by the battery 4140 f. The battery 4140 f is, for example, a battery, and can supply power to the external RTC 4140 e according to the switching state of the power supply switching unit 4140 h even while the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 is stopped. . The power supply switching unit 4140 h is, for example, a switch element.

  The power supply switching unit 4140h starts supplying power to the external RTC 4140e by the battery 4140f in response to the stop of power supply from the main power source, and in response to the start of power supply from the main power source. Power supply to the external RTC 4140 e by the battery 4140 f is stopped.

[5. History storage area]
FIG. 225 is a diagram illustrating an example of the history storage area 4150 y and the normal area 4150 x. The history storage area 4150 y (specific area) is provided inside or outside of the peripheral control MPU 4140 a (history information storage unit), and even when the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 is stopped, the battery 4140 f receives power supply. . The history storage area 4150 y is a space in which history information in which component information is associated with each piece of time information is written as described later. Therefore, the history information written in the history storage area 4150 y is stored without being volatilized even when the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 is stopped. In the present embodiment, in the case where the history storage area 4150 y is provided as a storage area of the non-volatile memory, the battery 4140 f can be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, read restriction is constantly made on the reading of the history information written in this way for the history storage area 4150 y. That is, reading of the written history information from the history storage area 4150 y is restricted unless a predetermined read restriction cancellation condition described later is satisfied. Details of the read restriction will be described later.

[6. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then main control processing will be described.

[6-1. Various random numbers]
In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used for game control, the jackpot determination random number used to determine whether to generate the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot determination used to determine the initial value of the jackpot determination random number The initial value determination random number, the reach determination random number used to determine whether to generate reach when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 The combination of the random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern to be displayed and the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 when generating the jackpot gaming state is determined. The random number for the jackpot symbol used in and the initial value determination random for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this jackpot symbol random number Etc. are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining the normal symbol per symbol, and a random number for determining an initial value for determining the normal symbol per symbol used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol. A random number or the like for a normal symbol variation display pattern used to determine the variation display pattern to be displayed on the symbol display 645 is prepared.

6-2. Main control processing]
FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing an example of main control processing executed by the main control MPU 4100 a mounted on the main control substrate 4100 of the main substrate 4000. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, and FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. FIG. 229 is a flowchart of an example of a main control timer interrupt process.

6-2-1. Main control side power on process]
When the operation switch (not shown) is operated from off to on, the power supply substrate 395 starts supplying power to the pachinko machine 1. As described above, when the power supply is started, the main control MPU 4100a first executes the main power supply side power-on process (step S1 in FIG. 226).

  When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10 in FIG. 227). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control MPU 4100a sets an initial address in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a starts output of the power failure clear signal (step S12). The main control MPU 4100a performs the first wait timer process (step S14), and determines whether a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit (not shown) as a power failure notification (step S16). Here, the reason why the first wait timer process (step S14) described above is performed is to wait until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notification voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, for example, 200 ms is set as the waiting time (wait timer).

  The main control MPU 4100a stops the output of the power failure clear signal (step S18). Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the RAM clear switch 624a is on (step S20).

  When the RAM clear switch 624 a is on, the main control MPU 4100 a sets “1” to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S 22). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 624a is off, the main control MPU 4100a sets "0" to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S24). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG erases game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a. It is a flag indicating whether or not. For example, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to “1” when deleting game information, and is set to “0” when not deleting game information. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in this manner is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The main control MPU 4100a performs a second wait timer process (step S26). The second wait timer process is a process for waiting until the start (boot) of the liquid crystal control board 3181 for performing the drawing control on the liquid crystal display 1400 is completed. In the liquid crystal control substrate 3181, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a reads various control programs compressed from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and develops the control programs in a RAM built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750 a. In the present embodiment, 2000 ms is set as a time (boot timer) until boot.

  The main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is “0” (step S 28 in FIG. 228). Note that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to “1” when deleting game information, and to “0” when not deleting game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is "0", that is, when the game information is not deleted, the main control MPU 4100a calculates a checksum (step S30). This checksum is for calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  The main control MPU 4100a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process described later (step) S32). If they match, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is "1" (step S34). Whether backup flag BK-FLG stores backup information such as gaming information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in main built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later Is a flag indicating The backup flag BK-FLG is set to “1” when the main control side power-off process is ended normally, and is set to “0” when the main control side power-off process is not ended normally. Ru.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG is "1", that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control MPU 4100a sets the working area of the main internal RAM as power recovery (step S36). . In this setting, the main control MPU 4100a sets “0” to the backup flag BK-FLG, and the power is restored from the ROM built in the main control MPU main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main built-in ROM”). The time information is read out and this power recovery information is stored in the work area of the main built-in RAM. Here, “at the time of power recovery” means, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is shut off, the state where the power supply is restored after the power interruption or momentary power interruption state, Also includes the state of recovery after that.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs power-on command generation processing (step S38). In the power-on command generation process, game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not "0" (ie, it is "1") in step S28 described above, that is, when deleting game information, or the checksum value in step S32 described above When the (sum values) do not match, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not "1" (ie, "0") in step S34 described above, that is, the main control side power-off process is normally performed. When not finished, the main control MPU 4100a clears the entire area of the main internal RAM by writing "0" to the main internal RAM or reading out and setting a predetermined value from the main internal ROM as an initial value. (Step S40). Thus, for example, the initial value 0 can be set to the jackpot determination random number, the initial value update type counter, or the like described above.

  The next main control MPU 4100a sets a work area of the main built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S42). In this setting, initial information is read from the main built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the main built-in RAM.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs a RAM clear notification and test command creation process (step S44). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a RAM clear notification command is issued to notify the peripheral control board 4140 that the main internal RAM has been cleared and initialization has been performed, and various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 are performed. Create a test command to execute the command, and store it as send information in the send information storage area of the main internal RAM. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear notification command, the peripheral control board 4140 transmits the RAM clear notification command to the liquid crystal control board 3181. On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the above-mentioned test command, it transmits the test command for performing various inspections of the sound source IC 4140 c, the liquid crystal control board 3181 and the lamp drive board 3167 to the liquid crystal control board 3181 and the lamp drive board 3167 etc. Do.

  Following step S38 or step S44 described above, the main control MPU 4100a stops the power supply by the battery 4140f (step S45). Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt initialization (step S46). In this setting, an interrupt cycle when main control timer interrupt processing described later is performed is set. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt permission setting. (Step S48). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S46, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 226, the main control MPU 4100a sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S2). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  The main control MPU 4100a determines whether a power failure advance signal is detected (step S3). In this determination, the main control MPU 4100a performs based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off (for example, when the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 is stopped) or in a power failure or momentary stop state, the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, and the main control MPU 4100 a A power failure notice signal is input as the monitoring circuit power failure notice.

6-2-2. Non Clash Random Number Update Process]
When the power failure notice signal is not input, the main control MPU 4100a performs non-corruption random number update processing (step S4). In this non-coincidence random number update process, a random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value, a random number for reach determination, a random number for variation display pattern, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, and the like are updated. Here, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is, for example, a main range for the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number in the state where the jackpot determination required initial value determination random number is not set. Every time the control side timer interrupt process is executed, it counts up by one. On the other hand, when the random number for jackpot determination initial value determination is set (updated) between the lower limit value and the upper limit value by the non-coincidence random number update process, the counter is limited to the upper limit from the jackpot determination initial value random number Count up to a value, and then count up from a lower limit value to a random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value. Then, again, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated by the non-coincidence random number update process. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the random number that is not related to the collision determination (big hit determination) is updated. In addition, the random number per normal symbol judgment mentioned above, the random number for determination initial value per normal symbol, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, etc. are also updated in this non-falling random number updating process. The normal symbol determination random number and the like are the same method as the above-described jackpot determination random number update method, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a returns to step S2 again, sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S2), and determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance signal (step S3). If there is no input of the power failure notice signal, non-coincidence random number update processing is performed in step S4. That is, the main control MPU 4100a repeatedly executes step S2 to step S4.

6-2-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
The main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 229 is repeatedly executed every set interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment).

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S2 of the above-described main control process.

  The main control MPU 4100a clears the interrupt flag (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the main control I / O port 4100 b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main internal RAM.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this embodiment, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, the time to be measured is reduced by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is executed, and the subtraction result becomes “0”, The time to be measured can be accurately measured.

  In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are lighted is managed according to the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process. In addition, according to the ordinary symbol and the ordinary symbol variation display pattern determined in the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric product control process described later, the time during which the ordinary symbol display 645 is lit is managed. In addition, in this timer subtraction processing, when it is determined whether or not an ACK signal is transmitted which indicates that the payout control board 1186 has normally received various commands transmitted by (the main control MPU 4100a) of the main control board 4100. In addition, an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is managed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the main control MPU 4100a performs the timer subtraction process each time, By subtracting the variation time by 4 ms and the subtraction result becomes “0”, it is possible to accurately measure the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts the ACK signal input determination time by 4 ms each, and the subtraction result becomes “0”, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main internal RAM.

  The main control MPU 4100a executes a true random number update process (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the main control MPU 4100a also updates the jackpot determination initial value determining random number and the jackpot symbol initial value determining random number, which are updated in the non-coincidence random number updating process in the main control process. The random number for the jackpot determination initial value determination and the jackpot symbol initial value determination random number are updated not only in the main control side timer interrupt processing but also in the main control processing to further improve the randomness of the value. Can. On the other hand, since the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter is counted up only each time the hit random number update process is executed. It has become. For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number counts up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number every time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The counter counts up from the jackpot determination initial value determination random number to the upper limit value, and then counts up from the lower limit value to the jackpot determination initial value determination random number. When the counter has counted up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated by the hit random number updating process. This counter counts the random number for jackpot determination up to the upper limit next time with the updated random number for determining jackpot determination initial value as an initial value, and subsequently, from the lower limit value (initially updated) for jackpot determination initial Count up to the value determination random number. In addition, the random number for determining the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol as described above are also updated in this success random number updating process. The method for counting the normal symbols per determination and the random number for determining the initial values per determination is the same as the method for updating the jackpot determination random numbers described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs a winning ball control process (step S80). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created based on the input information. Further, the main control MPU 4100a creates a self check command for confirming the connection state between the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 1186. The main control MPU 4100 a transmits the created prize ball command and self check command to the payout control board 1186.

  The main control MPU 4100a performs frame command reception processing (step S82). Here, the payout control board 1186 transmits a state command to that effect to the main control board 4100 when it is in a state where the ball is raised and the gaming ball can not be dispensed. In the frame command reception process (step S82), when the main control board 4100 receives the status command normally, it stores the information to notify that to the payout control board 1186 as output information in the output information storage area of the main internal RAM. At the same time, the status command received normally is shaped and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs an injustice detecting process for confirming an abnormal state related to the winning balls (step S84). For example, when the main control MPU 4100a reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 2013 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening) And the like, a prize ball abnormality notification command is created as an abnormal state, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special motorized prize control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and a start winning process is performed based on the input information. In this start winning process, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2014, the first starting opening sensor 2011 or the second starting opening sensor 2349 is input based on the input information. Do. When this detection signal is input, the main control MPU 4100a extracts the values of various counters for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number etc., and stores them as start information in the start information storage area of the main internal RAM. .

  The start information storage blocks 0 to 7 (eight start information storage blocks) are provided in the start information storage area, and the start information storage block 0, the start information storage block 1, the start information storage block 2,. The start information is stored in the order of the start information storage block 7. For example, when the start information is already stored in the start information storage blocks 0 to 6, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 is input, the new start information is stored in the start information storage block 7 Ru. At this time, identification information indicating that the first starting opening sensor 2011 has been detected is also stored. As a result, the start information storage blocks 0 to 7 are stored in chronological order as to which start opening switch the game ball is detected with (in other words, stored so that the history is known) ing).

  The start information stored in the start information storage block 0 is read out first. When the start information is read out, the start information of the start information storage block 1 is stored in the start information storage block 0, the start information of the start information storage block 2 is stored in the start information storage block 1,. The start information is shifted to the start information storage block 6, and the start information storage block 7 becomes an empty area. Here, when the start information is stored in the start information storage blocks 0 to 7, the main control MPU 4100a sets the number of the start information storage blocks as a holding ball, and the first special symbol storage lamp 643 and the second special symbol Control is made to light the memory lamp 644. Further, when the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2011 based on the identification information described above, the main control MPU 4100 a outputs the lighting signal or blinking signal of the second special symbol storage lamp 644. Create a command to control the Further, when the gaming ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2349 based on the above-described identification information, the main control MPU 4100 a outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal of the second special symbol storage lamp 644. Create a command to control the Then, the main control MPU 4100a stores the created command as output information in the above-described output information storage area. In the present embodiment, the gaming ball detected by the first starting opening sensor 2011 is stored in the starting information storage block as starting information as described above, and the number that can be stored in the starting information storage block is up to four. It is set to. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball detected by the second starting opening sensor 2349 is stored in the starting information storage block as starting information as described above, and the number which can be stored in the starting information storage block is four at maximum. It is set to.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a reads the start information from the start information storage block 0, and performs game processing based on the start information. In this game process, the value of the jackpot determination random number based on the read start information is taken out, and it is judged whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main internal ROM (a jackpot game state is generated or not (Hereinafter referred to as "special lottery"). At the same time, the main control MPU 4100a takes out the value of the jackpot symbol random number, and determines whether or not it matches the probability variation determination value stored in advance in the main built-in ROM (determination of whether or not to generate probability fluctuation) Do. Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of becoming a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). The jackpot determination value described above is read from the normal determination table in the low probability state, and is read from the probability variation determination table in the high probability state.

  The gaming state to be generated is determined by these determination results (lottery results from the special lottery). In this determined gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation display pattern based on the above-described random number for variation display pattern, creates a game effect command, and stores it as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area . On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a uses the drop information command to indicate a hit when the lottery result by the special lottery matches the jackpot determination value, or the drop information command indicating an omission when not matching, as the transmission information storage area. Remember to

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs a normal symbol and normal electric combination product control process (step S88). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric combination product control processing, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and gate winning processing is executed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input based on the determination result, main control MPU 4100a extracts the value of the counter etc. for updating the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol determination and stores the gate information storage of the main built-in RAM as gate information. Store in the area.

  In the gate information storage area, gate information storage blocks 0 to 3 (four gate information storage blocks) are provided, and gate information storage block 0, gate information storage block 1, gate information storage block 2, gate information storage Gate information is stored in the order of block 3. For example, when gate information is stored in the gate information storage blocks 0 to 2, the main control MPU 4100a stores the gate information in the gate information storage block 3 when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 is input.

  The gate information stored in the gate information storage block 0 is read out. When this gate information is read out, the gate information of the gate information storage block 1 is gated to the gate information storage block 0, the gate information of the gate information storage block 2 is gated to the gate information storage block 1, and the gate information of the gate information storage block 3 is gated. The gate information storage block 3 becomes an empty area by being shifted to the information storage block 2 respectively.

  For example, when gate information is stored in gate information storage blocks 0 to 2, the gate information of gate information storage block 1 is stored in gate information storage block 0, and the gate information of gate information storage block 2 is stored in gate information storage block. By being respectively shifted to 1, the gate information storage block 2 and the gate information storage block 3 become free space.

  Here, when gate information is stored in the gate information storage blocks 0 to 3, the main control MPU 4100a described above to turn on the normal symbol storage indicator 646 with the number of the gate information storage blocks as a holding ball. Based on the gate information, a command for outputting the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 646 is created, and this command is stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four gaming balls detected by the gate sensor 2202 can be stored as gate information in the gate information storage block.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a reads the gate information from the gate information storage block 0, extracts the value of the random number per standard symbol determination from the read gate information, and determines the standard symbol per design value stored in advance in the main internal ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches (hereinafter referred to as "normal lottery").

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on the output information.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs command transmission processing (step S92). In this command transmission processing, transmission information is read out from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. As the transmission information, as described above, a game effect command, a win information command, a RAM clear notification command, a test command, a prize ball abnormality notification command, a state command, and the like exist. Besides transmitting such transmission information, the main control MPU 4100a determines the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186 based on the value of the self check flag, which is set. When a fault occurs in the connection state, a connection fault command is created and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). As a result, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. Therefore, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs register switching (restoration) (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when such main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a uses the general control register in hardware by loading and saving the contents of the general purpose register on the stack, thereby using the general control used in the main control processing. It prevents the contents of the register from being destroyed. In this step S96, the main control MPU 4100a reads the contents thus accumulated and saved on the stack and writes them in the original register. After such return at step S96, the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission.

6-2-4. Main control side power off process]
FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing an example of the power failure occurrence processing shown in FIG. As described above, the power-off occurrence process (step S5 in FIG. 226) is a process that is executed when the power failure notification signal is detected in the main control process.

  When the power failure notice signal is detected in step S3 of FIG. 226 described above, the main control MPU 4100a executes an operation instruction of the battery 4140f (step S55 of FIG. 230), and thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt prohibition setting ( Step S56 of FIG. 230). The battery 4140 f is configured to stop the power supply when the power supply by the power supply substrate 395 is started. Further, by such setting, the main control timer interrupt process is not performed, the writing to the main built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected. The main control MPU 4100a outputs a power failure clear signal via the main control I / O port 4100b, or stops the driving signal being output (step S58).

  The main control MPU 4100a calculates a checksum relating to the processing area of the main internal RAM, and stores the calculated value and various game data in the backup area of the main internal RAM (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a numerically sets the game information of the working area of the main built-in RAM except the storage area of the value of the checksum (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG as the checksum. It considers it and calculates the sum. This checksum is used to check whether the content of the main internal RAM before the power failure is properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  The main control MPU 4100a sets “1” in the backup flag BK-FLG as a defined value indicating that the power-off processing has been performed (step S62), and the storage of the backup information is completed. When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the main internal RAM.

  The main control MPU 4100a clears the watchdog timer (step S64). As described above, this clearing is performed by sequentially setting the values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a operates the power supply switching unit 4140h to cause the external RTC 4140e to start supplying power from the battery 4140f (step S65). Then, the main control MPU 4100a executes an infinite loop and prepares for the stop of the power supply.

  By the way, in the above process, when the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") and the process upon power failure occurs, the power supply voltage actually becomes Since it is not stopped, there is a possibility that it can not return from the above-mentioned infinite loop. In order to avoid such a bad effect, the main control MPU 4100a is provided with a watchdog timer. The watchdog timer has a function of resetting the main control MPU 4100a if it is not updated for a predetermined time. Therefore, while the watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is being performed normally, the update is not performed when the processing upon power-off occurs. As a result, even if a power failure occurs due to a momentary power failure, even if the above-mentioned infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated through the same procedure as when the power is turned on. Become.

  Note that, instead of the backup area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a, the main control substrate 4100 may be provided with a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible not to require a constant power supply to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a may be used as a backup area where data is backed up by constant supply of power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to another area when the power is shut off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the save data to the processing area, so the load required for these processes can be reduced.

[7. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
7-1. Peripheral control side power on process]
FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control side power-on processing. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 performs processing when the peripheral control side power is turned on.

  When the peripheral control side power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S700). In this initial setting process, for example, in addition to the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a process of setting a wait timer after reset is executed. Incidentally, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs processing of initializing itself after such initial setting processing, whereby various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 are performed from the main control board 4100. Is ready to receive. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is in the state in which the interrupt permission is set. The time taken to initialize the peripheral control MPU 4140a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can be initialized in an extremely short time.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is “1” (step S702 in FIG. 231). The 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a flag that counts 16 ms in peripheral control-side steady processing described later, and is set to “1” when 16 ms has elapsed and to “0” when 16 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is "1" in step S702, that is, 16 ms has elapsed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets "0" to the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S704), and the 16 ms processing is in progress. The flag SP-FLG is set to "1" (step S706). The 16 ms in-process flag SP-FLG is set to “1” when the 16 ms steady process starts, and to “0” when the 16 ms steady process ends.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts timing of the processing time measurement timer PCT and starts 16 ms steady processing (step S708). The processing time measurement timer PCT measures the processing time of the 16 ms steady process.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs an external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT), that is, turns it on (step S710). The external WDT monitors the operation (system) of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and resets the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time. That is, it is regularly diagnosed whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is out of control. The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a built-in WDT, and in step S710, the peripheral control MPU 4140a clears the built-in WDT in addition to turning on the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT. Thus, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the built-in WDT and the external WDT in combination to diagnose whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is out of control.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the test mode flag TM-FLG is “0” (step S712). The test mode flag TM-FLG is a flag indicating whether the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis processing described later is a test command, and is “1” when it is a test command. Set to "0" when not a test command. Step S712 is performed based on the command analyzed by command analysis processing described later 16 ms.

  In step S712, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is "0", that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is not a test command, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an effect selection switch input process. The operation is performed (step S716). In this effect selection switch input process, it is determined whether or not an effect selection signal from the operation button unit 370 is input. Specifically, it is performed based on the operation history information of the detection signal from the operation button unit 370 created in the switch input process described later. This operation history information has a storage capacity of 1 byte, and the latest information is stored in the least significant bit B7. In the place where "1" is stored, it means that the logic of the detection signal from the operation button unit 370 is HI when the operation button unit 370 is operated, and "0" is stored. It means that the logic of the detection signal from the operation button unit 370 is LOW because the operation button unit 370 is not operated. In the effect selection switch input process, when all the values stored in the lower 4 bits (B7, B6, B5 and B4) of the operation history information are "1", that is, the logic of the detection signal from the operation button unit 370 is It is determined whether it has been HI for four consecutive times.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs lamp drive substrate command transmission processing (step S718). In this lamp drive substrate command transmission process, a predetermined command is set as transmission data, and transmission is started to the lamp drive substrate 3167 bit by bit from the serial input / output port. When transmission is started in this manner, the peripheral control MPU 4140a counts up the write counter each time transmission data is written to the transmission buffer, and counts up the read counter each time transmission data written to the transmission buffer is transmitted.

  In step S718, the door frame side lighting blink command and the game board side lighting described above are based on the command received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in command analysis processing described later. When the blink command is transmitted to the lamp drive board 3167, the lamp drive board 3167 receives the door frame side lighting blink command and the game board side lighting blink command and stores them in a command register (not shown).

  In step S718, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 transmits a motor drive command and a gear module drive motor drive command to the lamp drive board 3167 as transmission data. However, since the lamp drive substrate command transmission process is one process of the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a transmits the motor drive command to the lamp drive substrate 3167 every 16 ms, thereby the above-mentioned rotary lamp unit 240 , 260, 280 and outputs a drive signal to the rotary light motors 245, 265, 285. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can rotate the rotary light motors 245, 265, and 285 by outputting a drive signal to the rotary light units 240, 260, and 280 every 16 ms.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a initializes the sound source IC 4140c (step S720). In the initialization of the sound source IC 4140c, an analog amount of a volume knob (not shown) is detected, and a master volume value of the sound source IC 4140c is set so that a volume corresponding to the analog amount flows from the speakers 121 and 391.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the DSP-RUN signal is input (step S722). The DSP-RUN signal is input from the liquid crystal control board 3181 and is a signal for notifying that the liquid crystal control board 3181 is operating normally. The reading of the DSP-RUN signal is performed in peripheral control-side steady processing described later, and the determination in step S722 is performed based on the DSP-RUN signal read in the peripheral control-side steady processing.

  When the DSP-RUN signal is input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control substrate 3181 is operating normally, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs the RAM-CLR signal to the liquid crystal control substrate 3181, that is, turns it on. , (Step S724). The RAM-CLR signal is a signal for forcibly resetting the liquid crystal control board 3181. When the reset is not performed, the signal is turned on. When the reset is performed, the signal is turned off.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-RUN signal is not input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control board 3181 is not operating normally, or following step S724, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs command analysis processing (step S726). ). In this command analysis process, various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by peripheral control command reception interrupt processing and peripheral control command reception end interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a RAM clear determination process (step S727). In this RAM clear determination process, it is determined whether or not the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S726 is the RAM clear notification command, and when the analyzed command is the RAM clear notification command, notification is made accordingly. .

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a payout state determination process (step S728). In this payout state determination process, it is determined whether or not the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S 726 is the shaping state command, and when the analyzed command is the shaping state command, various types are determined based on the shaping state command. Perform notification processing.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs glass unit wiring check processing (step S729). In this glass unit wiring check process, it is determined whether or not there is a problem in the electrical connection of the lamp drive substrate 3167 or the like.

  Next, the periphery control board 4140 performs an effect selection switch main process (step S730). In the effect selection switch main process, various processes related to effects are performed based on the determination result of the effect selection switch input process in step S716 (the determination result based on the history information of the effect selection signal from the operation button unit 370).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs scheduler main processing (step S732). In this scheduler main process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the liquid crystal control board 3181 for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the result of the big hit lottery included in the fluctuation pattern and the schedule data according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol It controls the rendering operation by 3167 or the motor drive board 3013a (control unit). Specifically, in this scheduler main process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a newly sets data concerning the sound source IC 4140c, the rotary light motors 245, 265, 285, etc. based on the command analyzed in step S726, or sets this data. Update data (update pointer). In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a individually sets reproduction stop information for forcibly stopping reproduction by the channel of the phrase reproduction control register in the control register of the sound source IC 4140c, or individually cancels the reproduction stop information. BGM switching determination processing for determining whether to perform stop processing or to switch the BGM currently flowing from the speakers 121 and 391 to another BGM corresponding to the background image to be drawn and reproduced in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 Do. The BGM switching determination process is performed only once in the scheduler main process each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. That is, the switching point of BGM is the timing at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, in the scheduler main process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a to cause the VDP 4150c to execute the video display process according to the schedule data with respect to the video.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can not complete at least a part of the scheduler main processing normally due to various reasons while performing the above-described scheduler main processing as a part of its function. If a part of the rendering operations can not be performed, a function of provisionally executing a complementing process for compensating the part of the rendering operations is provided (complementing processing execution unit). In the present embodiment, when an event that can not execute a part of the rendering operation occurs, the periphery control MPU 4140a instead performs, for example, the part of the rendering in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the event. Execute complement processing to compensate for the operation (complement processing execution unit). In this complementary processing, for example, instead of the series of rendering operations performed at the time of the occurrence of the event, control is performed to execute another rendering operation to be substituted for the series of rendering operations, and the other The rendering operation causes the player to be recognized as if it is a part of the original rendering operation although there is a slight sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing the influence on the progress of the game.

  Specifically, in a case where the peripheral control MPU 4140a is trying to operate a specific accessory that is scheduled to pass, for example, in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to, for example, schedule data as the series of rendering operations. Instead of this, according to a spare schedule data separately prepared instead of the schedule data, control is made to display a feature of the image visually imitating the specific feature at the same position.

  Thus, as a method of detecting that the series of rendering operations that should have been performed originally have not been performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, for example, detects the origin position of the particular accessory at every variation start of the special symbol. It can be exemplified that the determination is made on the basis of whether or not the origin position matches the specified position every time the start of variation of the special symbol. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the original rendering operation can not be performed when the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the origin position of the specific combination that should originally be driven along the schedule data is not at the specified position. Can.

  Note that the above-described complementary processing is not limited to such contents, and other contents may be executed as long as the player can recognize that the progress of the game is not affected. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is associated with the time information acquired from the external RTC 4140e with the history information regarding the execution state of the complementary processing, and is a flag indicating that it should be written in the history storage area 4150y (hereinafter referred to as “history writing instruction flag ) Is set to “1”.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the history writing instruction flag to “1” when the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a can not cause the VDP 4150c to display some frames of the video based on the schedule data in the video display process described above. Set At the same time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a holds "part information" indicating that the part affected by the event is the VDP 4150c, and a part of the frame is displayed at any time in the schedule data. Hold fault information about what it should have been.

  Also, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can not newly set data related to the sound source IC 4140c, the rotary light motors 245, 265, 285, etc. based on the command, or can not update the set data (update the pointer). If it does, the history writing instruction flag is set to "1". At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses "part information" as information for identifying which one of the sound source IC 4140c, the rotary light motors 245, 265, 285, etc., the part that can not be set or updated as such. In addition to holding, it holds failure information on when such failure occurred in the schedule data.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can not individually set reproduction stop information for forcibly stopping reproduction by the channel of the phrase reproduction control register in the control register of the sound source IC 4140c in the reproduction stop processing described above, or the reproduction stop. If the information can not be released individually, the history writing instruction flag is set to "1" as described above. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can not set playback stop information individually as such, or at that time, as information for identifying which component it was not possible to release the playback stop information individually. As well as holding "part information", it holds failure information on when such a failure occurred in the schedule data.

  Alternatively, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may, for example, use the BGM currently flowing from the speakers 121 and 391 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the above-described BGM switching determination process at the timing when variable display of decorative symbols is started. The history writing instruction flag is also set to “1” when it is not possible to determine whether to switch to another background music to be rendered and reproduced. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a holds "component information" as information for identifying which component of the speakers 121 and 391 the BGM can not be switched as such, and Information on the time at which one of the schedule data items has occurred. In the present embodiment, the part information and the fault information held as described above are called history information.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs symbol main processing (step S734). In this symbol main processing, preparation for creating a display command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 3181 is performed based on the command analyzed in step S 726. The display command is a command for causing the liquid crystal display device 1400 to draw a predetermined screen. More specifically, the display command is a drop information command indicating a hit or release from the main control board 4100, a type of effect pattern determined based on the hit information command (effect by animation, effect by shooting, Mini character for making a mini character advance notice by causing a player to appear in a predetermined area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with an effect pattern information command indicating the effect by combining, etc. It is composed of a notice command, a switching point for switching an effect by real shooting to an effect by animation, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4140a stores the created display command in the peripheral control side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub built-in RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. This "peripheral control side transmission ring buffer" is a buffer that is used as if the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, the beginning is returned to the beginning Remember.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a BGM sound volume forced update process (step S735). In this BGM sound volume forced update processing, fade-in processing and fade-out processing are executed according to schedule data that defines the progress of BGM proceeding in the scheduler main processing of step S732. In this fade-out process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a mutes the volume value set in, for example, channel 0 of the phrase playback control register in the control register of the sound source IC 4140c to a minimum value until the above-mentioned fade-out period FOT elapses. Forcedly make smaller updates towards). On the other hand, in the fade-in process described above, whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4140a switches to another BGM corresponding to the background image to be drawn and reproduced in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the BGM switching determination process in the scheduler main process of step S732. For example, when the fade-in period FIT described above elapses, the volume value set in the channel 1 of the phrase reproduction control register a in the control register of the sound source IC 4140c according to schedule data defining the progress of other BGMs. At first, the minimum value Mute is forcibly updated to the minimum value Mute, and from this Mute to the maximum value Max.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a history writing process (step S736). In this history writing process, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a holds history information to be left, the history information is written in the history storage area 4150y in association with time information from the external RTC 4140e. The history writing process as described above will be described in detail later.

  Here, although the writing to the history storage area 4150 y is not particularly restricted, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a regulates the reading of the contents written to the history storage area 4150 y according to the read restriction releasing condition described later. (Reading restriction unit). That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a releases the read restriction only when the read restriction release condition is satisfied, and allows the written history information to be read.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not "0" ("1") in step S712, that is, when the command received from main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is a test command, peripheral control MPU 4140a Performs test command acquisition processing (step S737). In this test command acquisition process, based on the test command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S 726, a test command for performing various tests of the sound source IC 4140 c, the liquid crystal control board 3181 and the lamp drive board 3167 is prepared.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a test process (step S738). In this test process, the test command prepared in the test command acquisition process of step S737 is transmitted to the sound source IC 4140c, the liquid crystal control board 3181 and the lamp drive board 3167.

  Following step S735 or step S738, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT, that is, turns off (step S740). As a result, the external WDT is cleared, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a is not reset. Also, the external WDT starts clocking of the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped. The peripheral control MPU 4140a clears the built-in WDT only in step S710, and is configured to clear the built-in WDT every time 16 ms steady processing is started, that is, every 16 ms. Thus, the built-in WDT is designed to reset the peripheral control MPU 4140a if it is not cleared every 16 ms.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets “0” (termination of 16 ms steady processing) to the 16 ms in-processing flag SP-FLG (step S742), and returns to step S702 again. When returning to step S702, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is "1", and when the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is "1", that is, 16 ms has elapsed. At step S704, the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is set to "0", at step S706 the 16 ms under processing flag SP-FLG is set to "1", and the 16 ms steady process of steps S708 to S740 is performed. In step S742, the in-processing in-process flag SP-FLG is set to "0", and the process returns to step S702 again.

7-2. History writing process]
FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of the history writing process shown in FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4140 a determines whether or not the history writing flag is “1” in the above-described steady process every 16 ms, and ends the history writing process if the history writing flag is not “1”. , From the continuation of the regular processing every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the history writing flag is “1”, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a acquires time information output from the external RTC 4140 f (step S 736 B). Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a (control unit) associates with the acquired time information, and in addition to or instead of the history information related to the execution history of itself (control unit), for example, at least one component information and fault information The history information including the above is written in the history storage area 4150 y (step S 736 C). Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the history writing flag to be written in the same cycle, and for example, sets it to “0” (step S736D).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may also include, for example, the operation history of the player synchronized with each schedule data described above as the history information to be written in the history storage area 4150y in association with such time information. You may By doing this, it is possible to verify at a later date as to what effect the player has responded well to among the effect operations according to each schedule data.

7-3. Peripheral control side steady processing]
FIG. 233 is a flowchart of an example of the peripheral control-side steady process.

  When the peripheral control side steady processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is “1” (step S755). The 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in peripheral control side base timer interrupt processing to be described later, and is set to “1” when 2 ms has elapsed and “0” when 2 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is "1" in step S755, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets "0" to the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG (step S757), and the test mode flag TM It is determined whether FLG is "0" (step S760). As described above, this test mode flag TM-FLG is whether or not the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis process (step S726) in the peripheral control side power-on process is a test command. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is set to "1" when it is a test command, and to "0" when it is not a test command.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is "0" in step S760, that is, when the command received from main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is not a test command, peripheral control MPU 4140a performs switch input processing (step S764). . In this switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from a sensor is input through the lamp drive board 3167 or not. Further, in the switch input process, it is also determined whether the detection signal from the operation button unit 370 and the connection confirmation signal CHK are input. The peripheral control MPU 4140a determines, based on the connection confirmation signal CHK, whether or not a failure occurs in the electrical connection from the sub drawer relay board 1108 to the lamp driving board 3167. In the switch input process, a history of the input detection signal, the detection signal from the operation button unit 370, and the connection confirmation signal CHK is created. Specifically, history information having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit) is Each time the switch input process is performed, the information stored in each bit is shifted from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and the least significant bit B7 is assigned. Stores the input detection signal and connection confirmation signal CHK. For example, “1” is stored when the logic of the connection confirmation signal CHK is HI, and “0” is stored when the logic is LOW.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs liquid crystal serial command control processing (step S766). In the liquid crystal serial command control process, the liquid crystal control board 3181 transmits a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a switching point corresponding to this display command to switch from animation presentation to live presentation. The display command and the switching point are stored in the peripheral control side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub built-in RAM as described above, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a extracts the display command and the switching point from the peripheral control side transmission ring buffer Then, it transmits to the liquid crystal control board 3181.

  Display commands are sent from the serial I / O port. The transmission counter used for transmission is composed of a write counter and a read counter. The write counter counts the number of times data to be transmitted is written to the transmission buffer. The read counter is read from the transmission buffer. It counts the number of times. When the transmission is completed, the value of the write counter matches the value of the read counter. When the transmission counter is set to "0", the values of the write counter and the read counter become "0".

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not "0" ("1") at step 760, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is a test command, or Subsequent to S766, the peripheral control MPU 4140a adds "1" to the value of the 2 ms update counter C (step S768). The 2 ms update counter C is a counter that counts the number of times the peripheral control side steady processing has been performed, and "1" of the 2 ms update counter C corresponds to a time of 2 ms.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the 2 ms update counter C is “8”, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter C × 2 ms) (step S770). If it is 16 ms in step S770, the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is set to "1" (step S772). At this time, "0" is set to the 2 ms update counter C.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a performs 16 ms steady processing of step S 708 to step S 740 in the processing on power on at peripheral control shown in FIG. 231 whether or not the in-processing flag SP-FLG is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S774).

  When the 16ms in-process flag SP-FLG is "0" in step S774, that is, when the 16ms steady process is not performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a backs up the work area (step S776) and ends this routine. . In the backup of the work area, the information processed in the 16 ms steady process of step S708 to step S740 in the peripheral control side power-on process is copied to the copy area on the work area provided in the sub internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is not "1" ("0") in step S755, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, 16 ms has not elapsed in step S770 or 16 ms steady processing in step S774. If there is no setting of the information, the routine ends as it is.

7-4. Peripheral control side base timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 234 is a flowchart of an example of the peripheral control side base timer interrupt process.

  The peripheral control side base timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 130.227 μs which is a base clock. When the peripheral control side base timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 adds "1" to the value of the base update counter BC (step S780). The base update counter BC is a counter for counting the number of times the peripheral control side base timer interrupt processing has been performed, and "1" of the base update counter BC corresponds to a time of 130.227 μs which is a base clock.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the base update counter BC is “16”, that is, 2 ms (base update counter BC × 130.227 μs) (step S782). If it is 2 ms in step S782, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets "1" to the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG (step S784). At this time, the base update counter BC is set to "0". As described above, this 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms, and is set to “1” when 2 ms has elapsed and to “0” when 2 ms has not elapsed.

  On the other hand, when it is not 2 ms in step S782 or following step S784, peripheral control MPU 4140a performs clock signal generation processing (step S786). In this clock signal generation process, a clock signal is generated.

7-5. Peripheral control side command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 235 is a flowchart of an example of the peripheral control command reception interrupt process.

  When peripheral control side command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 starts receiving a command from the main control board 4100 (hereinafter referred to as "WR signal") and the main control board. It is determined whether or not both the signals for selecting various substrates from 4100 (hereinafter, referred to as "SEL signal") are "1" (step S790). The main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 first sets the SEL signal corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 to “1” and the WR signal to “1”, and transmits a command to the peripheral control board 4140.

  This command consists of one packet and four nibbles. This "nibble" means 4 bits, and 2 nibbles are 8 bits (1 byte), that is, 4 nibbles are 16 bits (2 bytes). The extraction of 1 nibble data is performed after the WR signal rises from “0” to “1” (referred to as “up edge”) and held for a predetermined time (for example, 20 microseconds (μs) to 50 μs). This is performed by the signal falling from “1” to “0” (referred to as “down edge”), and one packet is performed a total of four times.

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “1” in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a transmits a command to the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs command reception processing (step S792). End the routine In this command reception process, the received command (one of four divided commands) for one nibble is stored in the peripheral control side reception ring buffer provided in the sub built-in RAM. This "peripheral control side reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used as if the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember.

  After storing in the peripheral control side ring buffer, the peripheral control MPU 4140a adds “1” to the buffer write counter. The buffer write counter is incremented by one each time command reception processing is performed. Therefore, when one packet (4 nibbles) is stored, the buffer write counter has a value of 4.

  On the other hand, when the SEL signal and the WR signal are both "0" in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a command to the peripheral control board 4140, this routine is ended as it is. When transmitting a command from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, as described above, the predetermined time (eg, 20 μs to 50 μs) from the up edge to the down edge of the WR signal, SEL signal, WR signal, data (4 Although the bit is held constant, the influence of noise may disturb the signal and the command may not be received properly. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this noise, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 bits) (first time), after the predetermined time (for example, 1 μs) elapses, the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 Receive a bit). Then, it is determined whether or not it matches the first received SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits). If it matches with the first received SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits), it is determined in step S 790 whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “1”. On the other hand, when it does not match the first received SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits), after a predetermined time has elapsed, the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) are received again, and the first reception is received. The determination is repeated until it matches the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 bits).

7-6. Peripheral control command reception end interrupt processing]
FIG. 236 is a flowchart of an example of the peripheral control command reception end interrupt process.

  When the peripheral control side command reception end interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “0” (step S795). When the command transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is completed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the WR signal to "0" and then sets the SEL signal to "0" (down edge).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “0” in step S795, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a completes transmission of a command to the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs command reception end processing (step S797). End this routine. In this command reception end processing, “0” is set to the buffer write counter added in the peripheral control side command reception interrupt processing shown in FIG. When the command can be received normally, the buffer write counter becomes “4” because there are 4 nibbles per packet. Also, when the reception for one packet can not be performed, that is, when the buffer write counter is less than “4”, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the WR signal and the SEL signal are not "0" at step S795, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a has not completed the transmission of the command to the peripheral control board 4140, this routine is ended as it is. As described above, as a noise countermeasure, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the SEL signal once (for example, 1 μs) after receiving the SEL signal (for the first time), receives the SEL signal again, and receives the SEL signal received for the first time. It is determined whether or not they match. If it matches the first received SEL signal, it is determined in step S795 whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “0”. On the other hand, when the signal does not match the first received SEL signal, the SEL signal is received again after a predetermined time elapses, and the determination is repeated until the first received SEL signal matches.

[8. Liquid crystal display control]
The liquid crystal display control by the next liquid crystal display control substrate 3181 will be briefly described. When the liquid crystal control board 3181 receives a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a analyzes the display command, and executes display control processing based on the analyzed display command. Thus, in the liquid crystal control substrate 3181, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a controls the VDP 4150 c, whereby the VDP 4150 c controls the display operation of the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 1400.

[9. Game content]
The game mode in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a constantly executes the above-described history writing process on the peripheral substrate 4010 to continuously write the above history information into the history storage area 4150 y. That is, while the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives power supply from the power supply substrate 395 while power supply from the power supply substrate 395 is being performed, if the power supply from the power supply substrate 395 is stopped, the battery is discharged from the battery. While receiving the power supply by 4140 f, writing of the history information to the history storage area 4150 y is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1, the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 is the game panel 600 by the player rotating the operation handle portion 410 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game ball is started to be launched into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front. The game balls driven to the upper part in the game area 605 flow down in the upper left side or the right side of the game area 605 according to the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at a suitable position in the front of the game panel 600 with a predetermined gauge array, and the game ball is in contact with the obstacle nails to allow the game balls to flow down. While the speed is suppressed, various motions are imparted to the gaming ball so that the motion can be enjoyed by the player.

  The game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2300 is guided to the area on the left side of the center character 2300, enters the gate 2201 disposed on the left side of the center character 2300, and is detected by the gate sensor 2202 Then, based on the detection signal, the main control board 4100 generates an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 645 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), Normal symbols extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) elapse and based on normal random numbers (normal lottery results) are stop displayed (normal symbol indicator 645 emits either red or green) . The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, in the case where the drawn normal random number is a "normal hit" random number, stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (the normal symbol display 645 emits green light), and the drawn normal random number is a "normal loss" random number In this case, the stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a loss (normal symbol display 645 emits light in red). Then, when the normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of blades 2005 closing the second start opening 2002 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, for 0.3 seconds to 3 seconds), and the second A game ball can be awarded to the starting opening 2002.

  The variation time of the normal symbol or the expansion time of the blade 2005 at the second starting opening 2002 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later, for example, a special random number (special lottery) As a result, when "time per minute (including normal time per minute, high probability time per time including, etc.)" is extracted, the variation time or the spread time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern can be easily changed by selecting it after replacing it with a different table.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2202 while the normal symbol is being variably displayed in the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol in variation is stopped and generated and extracted earlier. Until the result of the ordinary random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary pattern variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 is temporarily stored and its display is suspended. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage indicator 646. The ordinary symbol storage indicator 646 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of the storage. In this example, up to four can be stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2202 is discarded.

  Further, the gaming ball which has been driven into the gaming area 605 and which has flowed down the left side of the center combination 2300 is brought closer to the center side of the gaming range 605 below the center combination 2300 by the side decoration member 2100. Then, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 2101 of the side winning opening member 2100 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2014, the main control board 4100 is predetermined for the payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the winning ball unit 800 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls are paid out to the storage tray 311. It is supposed to be.

  If the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 605 does not win in any of the general winning opening 2101, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, and the large winning opening 2003, It is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction, and is discharged from the out port 606 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. In addition, even if the gaming ball wins in any of the general winning opening 2101, the first start opening 2001, and the large winning opening 2003, the winning gaming ball is not returned to the inside of the gaming area 605 and is behind the gaming board 4. It is discharged to the lower side.

  On the other hand, when the gaming balls flowing down the left side of the center character 2300 enter the warp passage 2318a opened on the left side surface of the center character 2300, the game balls are supplied to the upper rolling surface 2335a of the movable shelf unit 2330 of the center character 2300. It is supposed to be The gaming balls supplied onto the upper rolling surface 2335a roll on the upper rolling surface 2335a in the left-right direction, are discharged forward, and are supplied onto the movable shelf 2339. In addition, since the movable shelf portion 2339 linearly reciprocates in the left-right direction, the course of the game ball can be distributed based on the timing of supply to the movable shelf portion 2339 and the position of the movable shelf portion 2339. When distributed to the rolling portion 2339b of the movable shelf 2339, it is discharged forward and supplied to the lower rolling surface 2335a. Then, the game balls roll in the left-right direction also on the lower rolling surface 2335 a and are released into the game area 605 above the attacker unit 2000. On the other hand, when the movable rack portion 2339 is distributed to the chance guidance portion 2339a, it enters the middle rear chance opening 2334a, and the game is made from the chance exit 2311a disposed immediately above the first starting opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2000. The game ball is released into the area 605 so that the gaming ball can be received to the first starting opening 2001 with high probability. Then, when the gaming ball is received by the first starting opening 2001 and detected by the first starting opening sensor 2011, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming ball units from the winning ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 etc. Are to be dispensed to the storage tray 311.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate 2201 and is detected by the gate sensor 2202 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of blades 2005 closing the second start opening 2002 When the game ball is received by the second starting opening 2002 and detected by the second starting opening sensor 2349 when it becomes possible to win by expanding for a predetermined time, the main control board 4100 etc. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when the game ball is won in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 and detected by the first start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor 2349, the first start In the port 2001, generation and extraction of a predetermined first special random number are performed, and in the second starting port 2002, generation and extraction of a predetermined second special random number are performed. Then, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 is started based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests "big hit", the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern A special advantage gaming state (for example, a jackpot game) is generated, and in the meanwhile, more game balls can be acquired by winning the game balls to the large winning opening 2003.

  The first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are also displayed on the first start opening 2001 and the second start opening 2002 as well as the variation display of the normal symbol by the entry of the game ball into the gate 2201. In the special symbol during the variable display, or when it is not possible to change the special symbol such as during the jackpot game as a special advantageous gaming state, the game ball wins to the starting opening 2001, 2002 and the first starting opening sensor 2011, While being detected by the second starting opening sensor 2349, until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible, the first extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 2011 and the second starting opening sensor 2349 The special random number or the second special random number is stored and its display is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is stored in the first special symbol memory display 643 or the second special number. So as to display the symbol memory indicator 644. The first special symbol memory indicator 643 and the second special symbol memory indicator 644 consist of two LEDs, respectively, and indicate the number of memories by the combination of the light emitting states of each of the lighted, lit, and blinking LEDs. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. When the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting opening sensor 2011 and the second starting opening sensor 2349 and the special random number of the second special random number are predetermined predetermined random numbers. By collating with the judgment table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table), it is determined whether the special random number is “losing”, “small hit” or “big hit”, and “big hit” , "2R jackpot" or "15R jackpot" is also determined. In addition, the random number determination table is also configured to determine "perhaps with a certain time variation", "perhaps with a certain variation", "per time variation", "a certain probability during a short time" and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port sensor 2349 (special lottery result is “small hit” In the case of “”, the main control board 4100 opens and closes the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and For example, it is possible to repeatedly win the gaming ball in the big winning opening 2003 twice).

  On the other hand, when the extracted first special random number and second special random number are "big hit", the main control board 4100 opens for a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after opening / closing the member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000. Opening or closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is made one round) when the predetermined number (for example, 10) game balls satisfy the condition of winning in the large winning opening 2003 ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”, respectively, advantageous game advantageous to the player It is designed to generate a condition. In addition, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, the random number determination table is exchanged with a high probability time-shorting table or the like according to the extracted special random number for "big hit".

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the starting winning combination of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening sensor 2349 (special In addition to the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 being variably displayed according to the lottery result), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the special random number (special lottery result) A corresponding effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped When all symbol rows are finally displayed in a stopped state, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result by the starting winning combination, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed, the effect image to be stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. In addition, since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger in size than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 641 and 642, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I will pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images on which a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed, a combination of symbols stopped and displayed with one fluctuating symbol row displayed is displayed such that a specific condition (reach) is satisfied. As a special lottery result in which the "reach effect image" is displayed, there are "reach per reach" and "reach lost". In addition, there is also a "reach development effect image" which is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image" and emphasizes and displays the remaining symbol rows variably displayed after reach display. Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only the effect display related to the start winning, but also the "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game.

  The variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 223). The variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control substrate 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 3181 based on the command according to the lottery result transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 to the peripheral control substrate 4140. ing. In this manner, since the variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to which the player pays particular attention is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, a certain one of the lottery results transmitted from the main control board 4100 For one command, a plurality of fluctuation patterns of symbols can be prepared in advance to increase the fluctuation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed in the "big hit" game and the like are also controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed can be increased without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 222, according to the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of prizes, specifically, the first character prize unit 3010, the signboard type prize unit 3150, the second A character combination unit 3180, a vertical combination unit 3240, a combination combination unit 3270, and a trap combination unit 3310 are movable. The first character combination unit 3010 and the signboard type combination unit 3150 are always visible through the opening window 2003a of the center combination 2300, but when moved, are positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In particular, the first character feature unit 3010 not only jumps downwards, but also moves the left and right large hands and the mouth, and "the cat is a cat with a part that is large and fierce, but awkwardly and does not give up somewhere" It evokes an image.

  The second character role unit 3180, the boat-shaped role unit 3240, and the combined role unit 3270 are shielded by the game panel 600 in the standby position (original position), and when moved according to the effect image, the liquid crystal display device It moves to the front of 1400 and becomes visible through the opening window 2300 a of the center character 2300. For this reason, when appearing, it is possible to give a great impact to the player.

  In particular, in the second character feature unit 3180, by moving the movable character body 3192 large and swiftly, it evokes an image of "a small but brain-clear mouse that will chase and chase cats coming after it". There is. Also, by making it possible to visually recognize whether or not the left hand portion 3196 of the movable character body 3192 moves, it is possible to grasp the expectation for the big hit, and it becomes possible to make the movement of the movable character body 3192 pay attention to the end. ing.

  In addition, since the bowl-shaped character product unit 3240 is provided with a mechanism that simulates the movement so as to be similar to the actual falling movement of the bowl, the impact of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241 can be enhanced and The type decoration body 3241 can be made to have realism.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the second character role-effect unit 3180, the relative movement distance of the movable character body 3192 is equal to the movement distance of the movable base unit 3200. Since the movement distance of itself is added, the movable character body 3192 can be largely moved even when the arrangement space of the mechanism part is relatively narrow, and thus the impact of the movable character body 3192 in the effect is enhanced. be able to. Further, since the driving force for moving the movable character body 3192 is generated by the second rack 3207 and the second gear 3206, a relatively simple and inexpensive configuration can be achieved.

  Further, since the second rack 3207 and the third rack 3208 are disposed in parallel to each other, the movable character body 3192 can be moved in parallel to the movable base unit 3200. In addition, since the second rack 3207 and the third rack 3208 are disposed to face each other, and the second gear 3206 consisting of a spur gear is interposed between them, the whole mechanism can be extremely simplified. The whole can be miniaturized.

  In addition, since the decorative body 3193 provided in the movable character body 3192 is a three-dimensional object modeled on the second character "mouse character", the player moves the "mouse character" to a large extent It can be made to visually recognize, and the interest in presentation can be raised.

  Further, the movable base unit 3200 is configured to include a plate-shaped base plate 3201 and a cover member 3202 attached thereto, and the cover member 3202 makes the base plate 3201, the second gear 3206, and the third rack 3208 Since it is shielded, it is possible to prevent the transmission mechanism such as the second gear 3206 and the third rack 3208 from being exposed as a background of the movable character body 3192 and to suppress the deterioration in appearance.

  In addition, since the moving direction of the third rack 3208 and the sliding member 3195 is regulated by the guide portion 3202a formed on the cover member 3202, there is no need to separately provide a mechanism for guiding the sliding member etc. Can be further simplified.

  In addition, since the decorative body 3193 is disposed in front of the movable base unit 3200, the decorative body 3193 can be made to face the player while the movable base unit 3200 can be viewed as the background of the decorative body 3193. it can. For this reason, the whole space which accommodates the decoration 3193 moves, Furthermore, the image which the decoration 3193 pops out from the space can be recalled, and the dynamic feeling of the decoration 3193 can be heightened.

  In addition, since the movable character body 3192 moves between the standby position shielded by the center character 2300 or the game panel 600 and the effect position which can be visually recognized through the opening window 2300a of the center character 2300, the movable character body 3192 The 3192 can be seen and hidden, and the player can be greatly impacted. In particular, by moving the movable character body 3192 to a large extent, it becomes possible to visually recognize the entire eye of the decorative body 3193 at the effect position.

  In addition, since the entrance of the movable character body 3192 is closed by the door body 3222, the movable character body 3192 disposed at the standby position is in an invisible or hard-to-visible state, and the movable character body 3192 moves toward the rendering position. When jumping out, unexpected actions can have a greater impact on the player.

  In particular, since the door 3222 is opened toward the inside of the center part 2300 around the rear end side rotation axis, the moving direction of the movable character body 3192 (protrusion seen from the player side) (Direction) and the opening direction of the door 3222 can be matched, and the movement of the movable character 3192 can be made to look strong as if the movable character 3192 pushes the door 3222 open. In addition, when the movable character body 3192 moves to the effect position, the inner surface of the door body 3222 can be visually recognized as the background of the movable character body 3192. Therefore, the presence can be enhanced by three-dimensional decoration.

  In addition, when moving the movable character body 3192 from the standby position to the rendering position, the door body 3222 is first opened, so that the movable character body 3192 can be prevented from colliding with the door body 3222, and the movable character body 3192 is damaged. You can prevent. Further, by opening the door 3222, the sense of expectation for the appearance of the movable character body 3192 can be enhanced, and the movement of the movable character body 3192 can be noticed. In other words, it is possible to call attention in advance so as not to miss the situation where the movable character body 3192 pops out.

  Further, a left hand portion 3196 as an additional decoration is provided on the movable character body 3192, and when the movable character body 3192 moves to a predetermined position, the left hand portion 3196 is displaced in a direction different from the traveling direction of the movable character body 3192. Therefore, the entire movement can be complicated, and the stage effect can be enhanced. In particular, the left hand portion 3196 is displaced using power when the movable character body 3192 moves in the direction of movement, so that the left hand portion 3196 can be moved without separately providing a dedicated drive source, and the configuration is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, since the left hand portion 3196 is displaced immediately before the movable character body 3192 stops at the movable end position, the movement of the movable character body 3192 can be watched until the end (until it stops).

  In addition, since the left hand portion 3196 is disposed at the tip of the movable character body 3192 in the traveling direction, the tip portion of the movable character body 3192 can be focused on, and the moving distance of the movable character body 3192 can be felt longer. it can. In particular, the movement of the left hand portion 3196 at the tip makes it possible to evoke an image that the entire decoration extends in the direction of travel, and make the movable character 3192 look large.

  In particular, since the left hand portion 3196 is rotatably supported with the front-rear direction as an axial direction, by converting the linear motion of the movable character body 3192 into the rotational motion of the left hand portion 3196, the left hand portion 3196 follows an arc. Can be moved. Therefore, the left hand portion 3196 can be moved in a direction different from the traveling direction of the movable character body 3192 with an extremely simple configuration.

  In addition, the left hand portion 3196 is smaller than the decorative body 3193, and the moving distance thereof is shorter than the moving distance of the decorative body 3193. Therefore, the left hand portion 3196 may be less noticeable than the decorative body 3193. The movement of the left hand 3196 can then be stared. In addition, since the left hand 3196 is a shaped object related to the decorative body 3193, the movement of the decorative body 3193 can be shown to be related to the movement of the decorative body 3193, even if the movement of the left hand 3196 is extremely small. Even if there is, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by the movement. That is, it can appear as if the second character "mouse character" is waving, and the movement of the "mouse character" can be animated.

  Further, by making it possible to visually recognize whether or not the left hand portion 3196 moves, the degree of expectation for the special lottery result can be grasped, so that attention to the left hand portion 3196 can be further enhanced.

[10. History read processing]
FIG. 237 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the history reading process. When an arbitrary command is accepted in the command buffer, an interrupt is generated and the following history read processing is performed.

  In this history read processing, first, the peripheral control MPU 4140a (command analysis unit) analyzes the received command (step S801), and when the received command is a specific command (step S802), the read restriction is performed. It is considered that the release condition is satisfied, and the read control by the read control unit described above is released (step S803). That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a permits reading of the history information stored in the history storage area 4150y (specific area) (history information control unit). Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can read out the history information corresponding to the player from the history storage area 4150y, and can output the read history information to the outside (step S804). At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can not only read out all the written history information all at once, but also can partially read out a group of history information for each piece of time information corresponding to a desired time zone. When the reading is completed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a applies the read restriction again.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a to control, for example, the VDP 4150c based on the read history information when the read out restriction is released in this manner, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 simply displays them at every time. The history information may be displayed. Alternatively, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may discharge the history information acquired from the history storage area 4150y to the outside from the serial port provided for debugging at the time of development when the read out restriction is released in this way. In this case, a serial port such as a computer is connected to the serial port, and analysis software installed in the computer analyzes the history information in detail and displays the analysis result. good.

  On the other hand, when the accepted command is a command other than the specific command, the peripheral control MPU 4140a maintains the read restriction described above, and restricts the reading of the written history information from the history storage area 4150y. Therefore, the written history information can not be read from the history storage area 4150 y unless the read restriction cancellation condition is satisfied.

  Here, in order to read out the history information from the history storage area 4150 y, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a uses software as a security such that instead of the condition that the read restriction cancellation condition is satisfied, it is instead Or, as hardware security, from the other end the history from the other end on condition that the switch of so-called dip switch connected at one end to the input port provided in peripheral control MPU 4140a, or the conduction of the jumper pin Reading of information may be permitted. Also, instead of using the input port as described above, the serial port provided in the peripheral control MPU 4140a may be used. As described above, by providing hardware security in addition to software security, history information is read from the history storage area 4150 y even if a specific command is erroneously input to the input port or serial port. Can be regulated surely.

[11. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 4140 in the pachinko machine 1 controls the rendering operation based on the schedule data according to the result of the big hit lottery over the variation time of the special symbol based on the variation pattern command. On the other hand, when an event that can not execute a part of the rendering operation occurs among the rendering operations based on the schedule data, a complementary process for compensating for the part of the rendering operation in a mode in which the event is hard to recognize A history information storage unit 4140z which is provided inside or outside of the periphery control MPU 4140a to be executed, the periphery control MPU 4140a, and has a history storage area 4150y, a character RAM 4150e capable of storing video data used for displaying video, and current time Stopped by the external RTC 4140 e to be acquired and the blackout monitoring unit (not shown) In response to the output of the notice signal, the power supply to at least the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the history storage area 4150y and the external RTC 4140e is started, or the power supply is started by the power supply substrate 395 as a main power source. A history information writing function (history information writing function that writes history information related to the execution history of the battery 4140 f as a secondary power source to be stopped and the peripheral control MPU 4140 a (the complementary processing by the relevant process) in the history storage area 4150 y Information writing unit).

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a read restricting function (read restricting portion) which continues read restricting of the contents written in the history storage area 4150 y, and a command analyzing function (command analyzing portion) which analyzes the contents of a command received from the outside. Based on the analysis result by the command analysis function, the read restriction is maintained if the accepted command is a command other than the specific command, and the read is performed if the accepted command is the specific command. A history information control function (history information control unit) is provided which releases the restriction and allows reading of the history information written in the history storage area 4150y.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 is based on the schedule data according to the result of the big hit lottery over the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control board 4100. It controls the rendering operation. In the periphery of the pachinko machine 1, there is a disturbing factor to ensure that the peripheral control MPU 4140 a continues the normal operation due to the influence of static electricity and the like. Under such a situation, there is a possibility that the peripheral control MPU 4140a may generate an event that can not execute a part of the rendering operation among the rendering operations based on the schedule data.

  In such a case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a complementing process for compensating the part of the rendering operation in a mode in which the event is hard to recognize, instead of normally executing the part of the rendering operation. Every time such a complementary process is executed, history information including the execution history is written in the history storage area 4150 y at each time acquired by the external RTC 4140 e. The history information written in the history storage area 4150 y is subject to read restriction in advance and can not normally be read. However, when a specific command is input, the read restriction is canceled and the history information is read. be able to. Then, based on such history information, it is necessary to grasp after the fact that the player can not enjoy the part of the rendering operation among the rendering operations that the player should have originally encountered. Will be able to For this reason, it is possible to easily analyze the cause of the failure caused by the above-described event, and it is possible to take measures to make it unlikely that an unexpected failure will occur in a game machine to be developed in the future.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the history information writing unit described above includes, as history information, part information related to a part related to the cause of the event for which the complementary process has been executed. History information including failure information relating to at what point of the schedule data some of the rendering operations that could not be executed are written in the history storage area 4150 y for each time information, In the event that the history information control unit cancels the read restriction when the accepted command is the specific command, an event for which the complement process is performed as history information written in the history storage area 4150 y Part information on parts related to the cause and some rendering operations that could not be performed due to the event are scheduled They are allowed to read the fault information regarding were should be running at any point of Yurudeta.

  In this way, it is not possible for the player to enjoy a part of the rendering operation in which scene by which part of the rendering operations that the player should originally encounter based on such history information It will be possible to grasp more specifically after the fact. For this reason, it is possible to easily analyze the cause of the failure caused by the above-mentioned event, and to take measures to make it more difficult for unexpected failure to occur in the pachinko machine to be developed in the future.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, in the second character combination unit 3180, the movable character body 3192 is moved in the horizontal direction, but may be moved in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  In the above embodiment, the second character product unit 3180 uses the drive motor 3204 as a drive source. However, the movable base unit 3200 may be moved using a solenoid as a drive source. In this case, if the solenoid and the movable base unit 3200 are directly connected, the transmission mechanism corresponding to the first gear 3203 and the first rack 3205 can be omitted.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the second character combination unit 3180 is shown to move the movable character body 3192 between the standby position where it is difficult to visually recognize and the effect position where it is visually recognizable. As in the unit 3010 and the signboard type character unit 3150, they may be arranged so as to be always visible.

  In the above embodiment, the second character product unit 3180 includes the drive motor 3232 to open and close the door 3222, but the power of the movable character body 3192 is used to open and close the door 3222. It may be configured to

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, although the game machine to which the pachinko machine 1 is applied is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

[12. Other Embodiments]
The above embodiments are examples for describing the present invention, and the present invention is not limited to the embodiments. The present invention can be implemented in various forms without departing from the gist thereof. For example, in the above embodiment, processing of various programs has been described sequentially, but it is not particularly limited. Therefore, as long as no contradiction occurs in the processing result, the processing order may be changed or operated in parallel. Further, in the above-described embodiment, a form in which a part of the above-described configuration is partially combined may be used.

1 Pachinko machine 395 power supply board (main power supply)
600 game panel (game board)
600e opening 1137 power switch 1400 liquid crystal display device (display device)
2300 Center feature (center frame)
2300a Opening window 3181 Liquid crystal control board (display control board)
3192 Movable character body (Movable decoration part)
3193 Decoration (main decoration)
3195 Sliding member 3196 Left hand portion (additional decoration)
3196a Arm part (transmission part for decoration)
3197 Spring (transmission part for decoration)
3200 Movable base unit 3201 Base plate 3201a Long hole 3201b Contact part (transmission part for decoration)
3202 cover member 3202a guide portion 3203 first gear (first transmission mechanism)
3204 Drive motor (drive source, motor)
3205 first rack (first transmission mechanism)
3206 Second gear (driving force generation mechanism)
3207 Second rack (driving force generation mechanism)
3208 Third rack (second transmission mechanism)
3208a Protrusions 3222 Doors 3232 Drive motor (rotational mechanism)
3233 Door cam (rotation mechanism)
3234 First link (rotation mechanism)
3235 Second link (rotational mechanism)
3236 Third link (rotational mechanism)
4100 Main control board (game control board)
4100a Main control MPU
4140 Peripheral control board (sub control board)
4140a Peripheral control MPU
4140 e External RTC
4140 g built-in real time clock 4140 f battery (sub power supply)
4140h power switching unit

Claims (1)

A game control unit that executes a lottery process based on establishment of a lottery condition and outputs a command to the effect control unit according to a result of the lottery process;
A display device,
The effect control unit that displays a lottery result on the display device based on the command received from the game control unit;
The main power supply that starts or stops supplying power according to the operation of the power switch,
A power failure monitoring unit that outputs a power failure notification signal immediately before the power being supplied is stopped;
Equipped with
The effect control unit
A control unit,
A history information storage unit provided inside or outside the control unit and having a specific area;
A video storage unit capable of storing video data used to display a video;
A time acquisition unit for acquiring the current time,
In response to the output of the power failure notice signal by the power failure monitoring unit, the power supply to at least the control unit, the history information storage unit and the time acquisition unit is started, or the power supply by the main power supply is started. As an auxiliary power supply to stop power supply,
Have
The control unit
History information writing means for writing history information based on time information acquired by the time acquisition unit in the specific area;
Command analysis means for analyzing the content of the externally accepted command;
A read restricting unit that restricts reading of the history information written in the specific area;
If the accepted command is a specific command, it allows reading of the history information written in the specific area to release the restriction by the read restriction means,
Wherein when the accepted command is a command analysis unit is a command other than pre Symbol particular command historical information that does not allow reading of history information written in the specific area to maintain the restriction by the read restriction means Control means,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images